manual de usuario silverado 2500hd 3500hd

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Silverado 2500HD and 3500HD Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-7142528) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

2014 Chevrolet Silverado 2500HD and 3500HDOwner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-7Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-38Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-22Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-32Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-38Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-56Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-62Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-96

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47


2014 Chevrolet Silverado 2500HD and 3500HDOwner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem,SILVERADO, and Z71 aretrademarks and/or service marks ofGeneral Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23159031 A First Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ Warning

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger


Introduction v

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel (Base/UplevelVersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Instrument Panel (PremiumVersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-7Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-19Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-26Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-27Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-29Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Universal Remote System . . . 1-30Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-32Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-32Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-33E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8-10.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6-5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

C. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-28.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-5 (Out of View).

E. Instrument Cluster onpage 5-11.

F. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-32.

Tow/Haul Selector Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-37.

Range Selection Mode (AllisonTransmission and Hydra-Matic®

6‐Speed Button) (If Equipped).See Manual Mode onpage 9-36.

G. Infotainment on page 7-1.

H. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1.

I. Integrated Trailer BrakeController (If Equipped). SeeTrailer Towing on page 9-76.

J. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

K. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-21.

L. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

M. Parking Brake on page 9-54.

N. Dome Lamps on page 6-7.

Fog Lamps on page 6-6(If Equipped).

O. Cruise Control on page 9-59.

P. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

Q. Horn on page 5-4.

R. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2 (If Equipped).

S. Automatic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive onpage 10-27.

T. Ashtray (If Equipped). SeeAshtrays on page 5-10 andCigarette Lighter on page 5-9.

U. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56 (If Equipped).

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-62 (If Equipped).

Pedal Adjust Button (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9-23.

Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).See “Brakes” in the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

V. Power Outlets on page 5-9.


1-4 In Brief

W. Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4(If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-5(If Equipped).

X. Power Take Off (PTO) Control(If Equipped). See Power TakeOff (PTO) in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Y. Passenger Airbag Off Control(If Equipped). See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3-29.


In Brief 1-5

Instrument Panel (Premium Version)


1-6 In Brief

A. Air Vents on page 8-10.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6-5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5-11.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-5 (Out of View).

E. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-32.

Range Selection Mode (IfEquipped). See Manual Modeon page 9-36.

F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37(If Equipped).

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-28.

H. Infotainment on page 7-1.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

J. Integrated Trailer BrakeController (If Equipped). SeeTrailer Towing on page 9-76.

K. Dome Lamps on page 6-7.

L. Automatic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive onpage 10-27.

M. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-21.

N. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

O. Parking Brake on page 9-54.

P. Cruise Control on page 9-59.

Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

R. Horn on page 5-4.

S. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

T. Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4(If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-5(If Equipped).

U. Power Outlets on page 5-9.

Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).See Ashtrays on page 5-10 andCigarette Lighter on page 5-9.


In Brief 1-7

V. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56 (If Equipped).

Pedal Adjust Button(If Equipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9-23.

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-62 (If Equipped).

Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).See “Brakes” in the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

W. Passenger Airbag Off Control(If Equipped). See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3-29.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors. Lockand unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. PressL and hold formore than two seconds to sound thepanic alarm. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm.


1-8 In Brief

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or the manual door locks. Tolock or unlock the door with themanual locks, push down or pull upon the manual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,Uplevel Similar


In Brief 1-9

Base Trim

For vehicles with power door locks:

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2-6 andPower Door Locks on page 2-7.

Windows

Manual Windows

Turn the hand crank on each doorto manually raise or lower themanual windows.

Power Windows

Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,Other Models Similar

The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window. The powerwindows work when the ignition is inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-27.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up to raiseit. See Windows on page 2-18 andPower Windows on page 2-18.

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.


1-10 In Brief

See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.. Press the switch to open the

window.. Pull the switch to close the

window.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. If available, raise or lower thefront or rear part of the seatcushion by moving the front orrear of the control up or down.

. If available, raise or lower theentire seat by moving the entirecontrol up or down.


In Brief 1-11

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-5.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If equipped, increase or decreasemanual lumbar support by turningthe knob forward or rearward.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-5.

Power Lumbar

To adjust the power lumbar support,if equipped:. On vehicles with two-way

lumbar, press and hold the topor bottom of the control toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

. On vehicles with four-waylumbar, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increaseor decrease lumbar support. To

raise or lower the height of thesupport, press and hold the topor bottom of the control.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-5.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.


1-12 In Brief

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-6.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-6.

Memory Features

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and theadjustable throttle and brake pedals,if equipped.

See Memory Seats on page 3-8 andVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5-46.


In Brief 1-13

Heated and VentilatedSeats

Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are on thefront doors. To operate, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN.

H : If available, press to coolthe seat.

I : Press to heat theseatback only.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3-9.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3-12.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-13.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-14.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-47.


1-14 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, turns off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system.

If the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position unlessthere is an airbag off switch locatedin the glove box.

If there is an airbag off switch, thevehicle does not have a passengersensing system. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3-29 for moreinformation.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-32 for important information.

Mirror AdjustmentUsing hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

Crew Cab Premium Trim withPower Folding Mirrors Shown,

Uplevel Similar

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.


In Brief 1-15

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-14.

If the vehicle has power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seatson page 3-8.

Crew Cab Uplevel Trim withoutPower Folding Mirrors

1. Move the selector switch locatedabove the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror in the desireddirection.


See Power Mirrors on page 2-14.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Manual Mirrors

If the vehicle has manual mirrors,they can be adjusted by moving themirror up and down or left to right tosee a little of the side of the vehicle,and have a clear view behind thevehicle.

Manual Folding Mirrors

If the vehicle has manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.


1-16 In Brief

Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer. See Trailer-TowMirrors on page 2-13.

Heated Mirrors

For vehicles with heated mirrors:

Press1 to heat the mirrors. If thevehicle has a towing mirror, only theupper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the towingmirrors is not heated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems (with AirConditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4 or DualAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8-5.

Park Tilt Mirrors

If the vehicle has the memorypackage, the exterior mirrors tilt to apreselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisfeature lets the driver view the curbwhen parallel parking. The mirrorsreturn to the original position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be programmedthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-17.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-17.


In Brief 1-17

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

The control used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Press the bottom of the control tomove the pedals closer to yourbody. Press the top of the control tomove the pedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9-23.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located below thedome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.


1-18 In Brief

k : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps inthe overhead console, press thebutton located next to the lamp toturn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampsare fixed and cannot be adjusted.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6-7.. Reading Lamps on page 6-8.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6-7.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped), andlicense plate lamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, roof marker lamps (ifequipped), and license plate lamps.


In Brief 1-19

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-3. Fog Lamps on page 6-6

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The front wiper control is located onthe turn and lane-change lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8 ,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

w : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

L : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.


1-20 In Brief

Climate ControlsThese systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger


In Brief 1-21

Climate Control System (With Heater Only)

A. Fan Control



See Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4.


1-22 In Brief

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. Fan Control

C. AUTO

D. Defrost

E. Air Recirculation

F. Outside Air

G. Air Delivery Mode Control

H. Display

I. Power Button

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

See Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4 or DualAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8-5 (If Equipped).

TransmissionRange Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is on the shift lever.

To enable:

1. Move the shift lever to theM (Manual Mode) position. Thecurrent range will display next tothe M. This is the highestattainable range with all lowergears accessible. As anexample, when 5 (Fifth) gear isselected, 1 (First) through5 (Fifth) gears are available.

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode on page 9-36.


In Brief 1-23

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction.

Transfer Case Buttons

The vehicle will have one of thesethree styles of transfer casecontrols. Use these controls to shiftinto and out of the differentFour-Wheel Drive modes.

Manual Transfer Case

This transfer case shift lever is onthe floor to the right of the driver.

Electronic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.


1-24 In Brief

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Each transfer case design offersdifferent drive options. The listbelow describes the different driveoptions that may be available.

2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use theFour-Wheel-Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations.

N (Neutral): Shift the transfer caseto Neutral only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-89 or TrailerTowing on page 9-76.

4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might chooseFour-Wheel-Drive Low if you aredriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, deep snow, and while climbingor descending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-40.


In Brief 1-25

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.

f : Turn to manually select radiostations or press to set the bass ortreble.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scanstations.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS or SiriusXM station; or CD,MP3, or WMA song. If information isavailable during SiriusXM, CD, MP3,or WMA playback, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7-7.


1-26 In Brief

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment System (RSE) andRear Seat Audio System (RSA), seeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7-38 and RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7-47 for more information.

Storing Radio Stations

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or SiriusXMstations.

For more information, see “StoringRadio Stations” in AM-FM Radio onpage 7-10.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpress O , to turn the radio on.

2. Press H to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounter-clockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5-7.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM® is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide

variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7-12.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in the centerconsole or on the instrument panel.External devices such as an iPod®,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or USB storage device canbe connected to the auxiliary portusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cableor the USB port depending on theaudio system.


In Brief 1-27

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”and “Using the USB Port” inAuxiliary Devices on page 7-33.

Bluetooth®

If equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth on page 7-49.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod® orUSB device. Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.


1-28 In Brief

Cruise Control

T : Press to turn the system onor off. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET −: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-59.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separateinfotainment manual that includesinformation on the radio, audioplayers, and navigation system.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is at the bottom ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems andenables access to thepersonalization menu.

The DIC buttons are on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

Some vehicles do not have thebuttons shown, however some ofthe menus can be viewed by usingthe trip odometer reset stem.


In Brief 1-29

3 : Press to display theodometer, trip odometer, fuel range,average economy, fuel used, timer,instantaneous economy and ActiveFuel Management® indicator, andtransmission temperature. Thecompass and outside airtemperature will also be shown inthe display. The temperature will beshown in °C or °F depending on theunits selected.

T : Press to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings forvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), trailerbrake gain and output informationfor vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,engine hours, compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U : Press to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5-46 for moreinformation.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-28.

Vehicle Customization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons next to the steering wheel.These features include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Lighting. Chime Volume. Memory Features

See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5-46.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the RVC displays a viewof the area behind the vehicle whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). This is displayed onthe inside rearview mirror or thenavigation screen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, near thetailgate handle, rinse it with waterand wipe it with a soft cloth.

For more information, see RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9-63.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.


1-30 In Brief

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-62.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,or may have one accessory poweroutlet and one cigarette lighter. Thecigarette lighter is designed to fitonly in the receptacle closest to thedriver.

There may be another accessorypower outlet in the rear cargo area.If the vehicle has a floor console,there is an accessory power outletinside the storage bin and one onthe rear of the floor console.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use

power outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

See Power Outlets on page 5-9.

Universal Remote System

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the steps

involved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-54.

Sunroof

Extended Cab

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when Retained


In Brief 1-31

Accessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the rear of the switchto vent the sunroof. To close thesunroof, press and hold the front ofthe switch.

Open: From the vent position, thesunroof can be fully opened eithermanually or by using theexpress-open feature. To openmanually, press the rear of theswitch to the first detent and holduntil the sunroof has reached thedesired position. To open usingexpress-open, press the rear of theswitch to the second detent andrelease. The sunroof will move tothe full open position. To stop thesunroof partway, press the switch asecond time.

Close: From the vent, or openposition, press and hold the front ofthe switch to close the sunroof.

The sunroof also has a rollersunshade that can be used to blockthe rays of the sun. To open thesunshade, press and unlatch it, androll it back. To close, pull it forwardand latch it into the closed position.

See Sunroof (Crew Cab) onpage 2-21 or Sunroof (ExtendedCab) on page 2-20.

Crew Cab

A. Open or Close

B. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the passenger sideswitch (B) to vent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the driver side switch (A)until the sunroof reaches thedesired position. Press and hold thefront of the driver side switch toclose it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of thedriver side switch (A) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. To express-close thesunroof, fully press and release thefront of the driver side switch. Pressthe switch again to stop it.


1-32 In Brief

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadethat you can pull forward to blockthe rays of the sun. The sunshademust be opened and closedmanually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof (Crew Cab) onpage 2-21 or Sunroof (ExtendedCab) on page 2-20.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemIf equipped, the vehicle has atraction control system that limitswheel spin and the StabiliTraksystem that assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. Both systemsturn on automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the instrumentpanel. The appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-42.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdg until g illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-42.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9-56.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.


In Brief 1-33

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-58.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand, on most vehicles, displays aDIC message when it is necessaryto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

To reset the Engine Oil Life Systemon most vehicles:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, thevehicle must be in P (Park) toaccess this display.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the display shows100%, the system is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuelon page 9-70. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9-68.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.


1-34 In Brief

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsRear Doors(Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof (Extended Cab) . . . . . 2-20Sunroof (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-2.

With Remote Start (withoutRemote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press/to start the engine from outside the



vehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46 for additionalinformation.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-10.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46. If enabled through theDIC, the exterior lights may turn on.See “Approach Lighting” underVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5-46.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Vehicle Alarm Systemon page 2-10.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/

RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerfor transmitter programming.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows youto start the engine from outside ofthe vehicle. It may also start up thevehicle's heating or air conditioning

systems and rear window defogger.Normal operation of the system willreturn after the key is turned to theON/RUN position.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, the climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature. If thevehicle does not have an automaticclimate control system, the systemwill turn on at the setting the vehiclewas set to when the vehicle waslast turned off.

During a remote start, if the vehiclehas an automatic climate controlsystem and heated seats, theheated seats will turn on duringcolder outside temperatures and willshut off when the key is turned toON/RUN. If the vehicle does nothave an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start,manually turn the heated seats onand off. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats on page 3-9.



Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.If you cannot see the vehicle'slamps, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the vehicle isrunning. The doors will belocked and the climate controlsystem may come on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat the stepsfor a 10-minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedonly once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, the engine run time can beextended by another 10 minuteswithin the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before theengine stops.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote vehiclestart.

Once two remote starts, or a singleremote start with one time extensionhas been done, the vehicle must bestarted with the key. After the key isremoved from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.



The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,the hood is not closed, or if there isan emission control systemmalfunction and the malfunctionindicator lamp is on.

Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

See your dealer to add themanufacturer's remote vehicle startfeature to the vehicle.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or manual door locks. To lockor unlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.



Power Door Locks

Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,Up-Level Similar

Base Trim

For vehicles with power door locks:

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThe vehicle may have the delayedlocking feature. When locking thedoors with the power lock switchand a door is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Delay DoorLock” under Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons) on page 5-46.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5-46.

Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.



If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Doors

Rear Doors(Extended Cab)

To open a rear access door from theoutside, first open the front door.Then, use the handle located on thefront edge of the rear access door toopen it.

The rear access door must beclosed before the front door canclose.



To open a rear access door from theinside, first open the front door.Then, use the handle located on theinside of the rear access doorto open.

Tailgate

{ Warning

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgate caneasily lose their balance and fallin response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety beltproperly.

On vehicles with a lock on thetailgate, use the key to lock orunlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on itshandle while pulling thetailgate down.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches.

After closing the tailgate, pull it backto be sure it latches securely.

Tailgate Removal

The tailgate can be removed toallow for different loading situations.Assistance may be needed with theremoval to avoid damage to thevehicle.

On vehicles with a Rear VisionCamera, it must be disconnectedbefore removing the tailgate. SeeRear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-63.



To remove the tailgate:

1. Raise the tailgate slightly, pullout and hold the cable retainingclip (A). Push the cable (C) upand off of the bolt (B). Repeat onthe other side.

2. With the tailgate about halfwayopen, lift the right edge of thetailgate from the lower pivot.

On vehicles with the tailgateassist feature, raise the tailgatenearly all the way to the closedposition prior to removing theleft edge.

3. Move the tailgate to the right torelease the left edge.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure the tailgateis secure.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

This is the security light.

To arm the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.The security light should flash.



If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm will not beactivated until all doors areclosed and the security lightgoes off.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight will stop flashing and go offafter approximately 30 seconds.The system is armed when thesecurity light goes off.

If a locked driver door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter, a10 second pre-alarm will occur. Thehorn will chirp and the lights willflash. If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter during the 10 secondpre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Thevehicle's headlamps will flash andthe horn will sound for about30 seconds, then will turn off to savethe battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe key or the manual door lock.

It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch or the RKEtransmitter. The vehicle can bestarted with the correct key if thealarm is set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. If you do not want to activate the

theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter.

If the alarm is set off, press unlockon the RKE transmitter or place thekey in the ignition and turn it toSTART.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. Lower the driver window andopen the driver door.

2. Press lock on the RKEtransmitter.

3. Close the door and wait for thesecurity light to go out.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10-40.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, see yourdealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.



The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may be a

problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10-40. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key III+ tohave a new key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.



5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsIf equipped, adjust manual mirrorsby moving the mirror up and downor left to right to see a little of theside of the vehicle and to have aclear view behind the vehicle.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer.



The lower portion of the mirror isconvex. A convex mirror's surface iscurved to see more from the driverseat. The convex mirror can beadjusted manually to the driverpreferred position for better vision.

The mirror may have a turn signalarrow that flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Power Mirrors


Other Models Similar

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.


4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seatson page 3-8 for more information.

Crew Cab Up‐Level Trim withoutPower Folding Mirrors

1. Move the selector switch locatedabove the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.



2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror in the desireddirection.


Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Folding Mirrors


Other Models Similar

Power Folding

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seatson page 3-8 for more information.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfolding mirrors. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.



Manual Folding

If equipped with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Automatic Dimming

If equipped with an automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically dimes for theglare of the headlamps from behind.This feature is controlled by the onand off setting on the insiderearview mirror.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-17.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may also have a turnsignal indicator on the mirror. Anarrow on the mirror flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. If thevehicle has towing mirrors, only theupper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the towingmirrors is not heated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems (with AirConditioning) on page 8-1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8-4 or DualAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8-5.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the passenger and/ordriver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature lets thedriver view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), or theignition is turned off or toOFF/LOCK.

Turn this feature on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5-46.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare fromthe headlamps from behind.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See a dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorAdjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Operation

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9-63

If the vehicle has a RVC, the Obutton for turning the dimmingfeature on or off will not beavailable.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See adealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Manual WindowsTurn the hand crank on each doorto manually raise or lower themanual windows.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.


The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window. The powerwindows only work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.

Push the switch down to lower thewindow, and pull up the front of theswitch to raise the window.



Express-down Windows

The express-down feature allow thedriver and front passenger windowsto be lowered without holding theswitch. Push the switch down to thesecond detent, then release, toactivate the express-down mode.The express-down mode can becanceled at any time by pulling upon the front of the switch. To openthe window partway, push the switchdown to the first detent until thewindow is at the desired position.

Window Lockout


o (Window Lockout): The driverdoor power window switch has alockout feature. This featureprevents the rear windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to engageor disengage the lockout feature. Anindicator light on the switch willcome on when the lockout feature isengaged, and will go off whendisengaged.

Rear Windows

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.. Press the switch to open the

window.. Pull the switch to close the

window.



The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.

Roof

Sunroof (Extended Cab)

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN or the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the rear of the switchto vent the sunroof. To close thesunroof, press and hold the front ofthe switch.

Open: From the vent position, thesunroof can be fully opened eithermanually or by using theexpress-open feature. To openmanually, press the rear of theswitch to the first detent and holduntil the sunroof has reached thedesired position. To open usingexpress-open, press the rear of theswitch to the second detent andrelease. The sunroof will move tothe full open position. To stop thesunroof partway, press the switch asecond time.

Close: From the vent, or openposition, press and hold the front ofthe switch to close the sunroof.

The sunroof also has a rollersunshade that can be used to blockthe rays of the sun. The rollersunshade can be manually operatedwith the sunroof in an open or



closed position. To open thesunshade, press and unlatch it, androll it back. To close, pull it forwardand latch it into the closed position.


Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal and

roof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

Sunroof (Crew Cab)

A. Open or Close

B. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN or the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the passenger sideswitch (B) to vent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the driver side switch (A)until the sunroof reaches thedesired position. Press and hold thefront of the driver side switch toclose it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of thedriver side switch (A) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. To express-close thesunroof, fully press and release thefront of the driver side switch. Pressthe switch again to stop it.


The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.



If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Extended CabFull Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Rear Seats (All SplitBench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-29Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The rear seat has adjustableheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions.

The height of the headrest can beadjusted. Pull the headrest up toraise it. To lower the headrest, pushdown on the headrest.

Rear outboard headrests are notdesigned to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Split Bench or Bucket Seat

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Some vehicles have a folding frontbench seat.



Bench Seat

To adjust the seat:

1. Move the lever to the right tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the lever.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is lockedinto place.

Folding the Bench Seat

To fold the bench seat:

1. Push back on the front of theseatback.

2. Pull one of the release levers, ateach end of the seat on thelower rear of the seatback,completely out.

3. While holding the lever out, foldthe seatback forward until itrests on the seat.

4. Release the lever.

Do not try to release theseatback before pulling therelease levers or the releasesystem can be damaged.

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



Reverse the steps to raise theseatback. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure the seatbackis locked in the upright positionbefore driving. Make sure the safetybelts are not twisted or caught in theseatback.

Center SeatIf equipped, the center frontseatback doubles as an armrest andcupholder/storage area for the driverand passenger when the centerfront seat is not used. Do not use itas a seating position when theseatback is folded down.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. If available, raise or lower thefront or rear part of the seatcushion by moving the front orrear of the control up or down.

. If available, raise or lower theentire seat by moving the entirecontrol up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3-6.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If equipped, increase or decreasemanual lumbar support by turningthe knob forward or rearward.



Power Lumbar

To adjust the power lumbar support,if equipped:. On vehicles with two-way

lumbar, press and hold the topor bottom of the control toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport.

. On vehicles with four-waylumbar, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increaseor decrease lumbar support. To

raise or lower the height of thesupport, press and hold the topor bottom of the control.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

The seatback will automaticallyfold forward.

2. To recline, move the seatbackrearward to the desired position,then release the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.



Memory Seats

If available, the controls on thedriver door are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driverseat, outside mirrors, and theadjustable throttle and brake pedals,if equipped.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, both outside mirrors,and the throttle and brakepedals, if equipped.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-14and Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal on page 9-23.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottle and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1” or“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seat,outside mirrors, and adjustablethrottle and brake pedals will moveto the position previously stored forthe identified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if equipped, to storedpositions when entering the vehicle.

To activate, unlock the driver doorwith the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, and adjustablepedals, if equipped, will move to thememory position associated with thetransmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons) on page 5-46.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, or power mirror buttons,or the adjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedalswhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold the



appropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature can move the seatrearward to allow extra room to exitthe vehicle.

B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto recall the easy exit seat position.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit seat feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticseat movement occurs when theignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in). To move the seat backfarther, pressB again until theseat is all the way back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5-46.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything on

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



Heated and Cooled Seat ButtonsShown, Heated Seat Buttons

Similar

If available, the buttons are on thefront doors. To operate, the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN.

H (Cooled Seat): If available,press to cool the seat.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toheat the seatback only.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

On vehicles with heated seats, theheated seats are canceled10 seconds after the ignition isturned off.

On vehicles with heated and cooledseats, the heated and cooled seatsare canceled when the ignition isturned off.

To use this feature after restartingthe vehicle, press the desired buttonagain.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start. Theheated seats will be canceled when

the ignition is turned on. Press thedesired button to use the heatedseats after the vehicle is started.

The lights on the heated seatbuttons do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-4.



Rear Seats

Rear Seats (ExtendedCab Full Bench)

Folding the Rear Seat

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seat:

1. Pull up on the front of the seatcushion while pulling down onthe release strap under the seatcushion.

2. Pull the seat cushion up until itlatches with the seatback.

3. Pull forward on the seat cushionto make sure it is locked inplace.

To unfold the seat:

1. Push the seat cushion rearwardwhile pulling the release strapunder the seat cushion. Pull theseat cushion down until itlatches.

2. Pull up on the seat cushion tomake sure it is locked in place.

Make sure the safety belts arenot twisted or caught in the seatcushion.

{ Warning


Rear Seats (All SplitBench)

Folding Rear Seat

Either side of the rear seat can befolded for added cargo space.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.



Make sure that nothing is onthe seat.

To fold the seat, slowly pull the seatcushion up.

To return the seat to the normalseating position, slowly pull the seatcushion down.

Make sure the safety belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatcushion.

{ Warning


Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-16.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-39 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-41.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltIf the vehicle is a regular cab, thenall seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If thevehicle is a crew or extended cab,then all seating positions in thevehicle have a lap-shoulder beltexcept for the center frontpassenger position (if equipped),which has a lap belt. See Lap Belton page 3-19 for more information.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-32for more information.

If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, when using thelap-shoulder belt in a rear centerseating position of a crew-cab,tilt the latch plate and keeppulling the safety belt until it canbe buckled.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-20.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-13.



Regular and Crew Cab

To move the adjuster down for theregular and crew cabs, squeeze thebuttons on the sides of the heightadjuster and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.

Extended Cab

On the extended cab, push down onthe release button and move theheight adjuster to the desiredposition.

You can move the adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After you move the adjuster towhere you want it, try to move itdown, without squeezing the buttonsfor the regular and crew cabs,or without pushing the releasebutton for extended cabs, to makesure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if yourvehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3-21.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the shoulder belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto the storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-14.

Your vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.



To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3-20.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in a



crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-16.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-21.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-17.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and the personseated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3-25.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3-39 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3-41.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-17 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver airbag is in the middle ofthe steering wheel.

The right front passenger airbag isin the instrument panel on thepassenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andright front passenger, they are in theside of the seatbacks closest tothe door.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,and second row outboardpassengers, they are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of your vehicle is 3 855 kg(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle hassingle stage airbags. If the GVWR isbelow 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then thevehicle has dual stage airbags.Vehicles with a full bench seat areequipped with single state airbags.You can find the GVWR on thecertification label on the rear edgeof the driver door. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15 for moreinformation.

The vehicle may have dual-stagefrontal airbags. Dual-stage airbagsadjust the restraint according tocrash severity. The vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors, whichhelp the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact.For moderate frontal impacts,dual-stage airbags inflate at a level

less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs.

Vehicles with dual stage airbagsalso have seat position sensorswhich enable the sensing system tomonitor the position of the driverseat (all models), and on crew caband extended cab models the rightfront passenger seat on light dutymodels only. The seat positionsensor provides information that isused to determine if the airbagsshould deploy at a reduced level orat full deployment.

The vehicle may or may not haveseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3-22. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. In addition,these roof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above



the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,or if the sensing system predictsthat the vehicle is about to roll overon its side, or in a severe frontalimpact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In a

rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact and roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of



full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-25 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3-27.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle may have a feature thatmay automatically unlock the doors,turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly

other parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf one of the switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations is located inthe glove box, the vehicle has anairbag on-off switch that you canuse to manually turn on or off theright front passenger airbag.

United States

Canada and Mexico



If the vehicle does not have anairbag off switch, it may have apassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-32.

This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in theright front passenger position is amember of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 yearold) must ride in the front seatbecause:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. My vehicle has a rear seat too

small to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or

. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. Although children ages 1 to 12

ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:. Causes the passenger airbag to

pose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harm

from turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the instrumentpanel or windshield in a crash.

{ Warning

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there. Do not turnoff the passenger airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.



United States

Canada and Mexico

To turn off the right front passengerairbag, insert the ignition key intothe switch, push in, and move theswitch to the off position.

The word OFF or the off symbol willcome on in the passenger airbagstatus indicator located in theoverhead console to let you knowthat the right front passenger airbagis off, after the system check iscompleted. The airbag off light willcome on and stay on to let youknow that the right front passenger'sairbag is off. See Airbag On-OffLight on page 5-17.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



United States

Canada and Mexico

To turn the right front passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is now enabled (may inflate).See Airbag On-Off Light onpage 5-17 for more information.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,unless there is an airbag off switchlocated in the glove box. If there isan airbag off switch, the vehicledoes not have a passenger sensingsystem. See Airbag On-Off Switchon page 3-29 for more information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start to start thevehicle from a distance, if equipped,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or



OFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-19.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the roof-railairbags (if equipped) are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat andsafety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, a



rear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-19.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbag

anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.



4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Center Front Seat Position) onpage 3-58 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3-58 orSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3-55.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting

properly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-37 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on an

unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.



{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange your vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they may

keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger'sposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger'sseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on top

of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-32.

If you have any questions aboutthis, you should contactCustomer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13-1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10-68 for additionalimportant information.



Q: What if I added a snow plow?Will it keep the airbags fromworking properly?

A: We have designed our airbagsystems to work properly undera wide range of conditions,including snow plowing withvehicles that have the optionalSnow Plow Prep Package(RPO VYU). But do not changeor defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do,it can damage your snow plowand your vehicle, and it maycause an airbag inflation.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this

manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13-1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-17.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, see

Where Are the Airbags? onpage 3-24. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.



If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-17.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-14. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-14.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.



The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

If a child restraint is secured in theright front passenger seat, and thevehicle has a switch in the glovebox to manually turn off the rightfront passenger airbag, see AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3-29 andSecuring Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat Position) on page 3-58or Securing Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3-58or Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3-55 formore information, includingimportant safety information.




{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem or airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)


{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, a



rear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Regular Cab — Two-PassengerFront Seat



Regular Cab — Three-PassengerFront Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter front seat position. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat Position) on page 3-58or Securing Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3-58or Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3-55 formore information.

Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

For crew and extended cab models,the rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal lower anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

For regular cab models, there is ananchor symbol on the covers toassist you in locating the top tetheranchors.

Regular Cab



Do not install a child restraint in thecenter seat position. See SecuringChild Restraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3-58 or SecuringChild Restraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3-58 or SecuringChild Restraints (Rear SeatPosition) on page 3-55 for moreinformation.

For regular cab models, the toptether anchors are located undercovers on the back panel behind thepassenger seat. Remove the trimplug to access the anchor. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Crew Cab Shown, Extended CabSimilar

For crew and extended cab models,the top tether anchors are the loopslocated near the top of the seatbackfor each rear seating position.These loops will be used to routethe top tether through, as well as, tosecure the top tether in the vehicle.Be sure to use an anchor (loop)located on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Be sure to read the instructionsfollowing to properly install a childrestraint using these loops.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-45 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor,except for the center top tether

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

anchors in the crew and extendedcabs. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor orattachment to come loose or evenbreak during a crash. A child orothers could be injured. To reducethe risk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-45.



This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

Regular Cab Models

1. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if your vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

1.1. Pull the passengerseatback forward by pullingthe recliner handle upwardto access the top tetheranchor. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-6 foradditional information.

1.2. Find the top tether anchor.

1.3. Remove the cover toexpose the anchor.

1.4. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.



2. See Securing Child Restraints(Center Front Seat Position) onpage 3-58 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3-58 orSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3-55 forinstructions on installing thechild restraint using the safetybelts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side-to-side andback-and-forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Crew and Extended Cab Models

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (loop), if your vehicle hasone. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition



Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

2.1. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the reardriver side position:

A. Raise the headrestor head restraint.

B. Route the toptether (B) betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts,through the loop (A),behind the inboardheadrest or head

restraint post, andunder the centershoulder belt (C).

C. Attach the toptether (B) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (D) atthe center rearseating position.

2.2. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the rearcenter position:

A. Route the toptether (B) throughthe center loop (D),and behind theinboard passengerside headrest orhead restraint post.

B. Attach the toptether (B) to the toptether anchor (loop)at the rearpassenger sideseating position.

2.3. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the rearpassenger position:

A. Raise the headrestor head restraint.

B. Route the toptether (B) betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts,through the loop onthe passenger sideand behind theinboard headrest orhead restraint post.

C. Attach the toptether (B) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (D) atthe center rearseating position.



2.4. Tighten the top tether whenand as the child restraintmanufacturer'sinstructions say.

When the top tether istightened, the anchor (loop)may bend. This is normaland will not damage thevehicle.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side-to-side andback-and-forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-47 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-45.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

For crew cab second rowseatings positions, tilt the latchplate to adjust the belt if needed.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)

With Passenger SensingSystem

This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-45.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-32 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-19 for more informationon this, including important safetyinformation.


{ Warning


The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system is

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-32 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-19.






Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.






7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-47 for more information.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with apassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-32 for moreinformation.


With Airbag Off Switch


There may be a switch in the glovebox that you can use to turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag.See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3-29 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front unless airbag is off.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ Warning


Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right front

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.



If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.






If you have no other choice butto install a rear-facing childrestraint in this seat, make surethe airbag is off once the childrestraint has been installed.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the airbag off lightshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5-17.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt through

or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.






7. If your vehicle does not have arear seat and your child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-47.



If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the right frontpassenger airbag when you remove

the child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3-29 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only





Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passengerseat. Here is why:

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger's airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. Always secure arear-facing child restraint in arear seat.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for how and

where to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-47 fortop tether anchor locations.








Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.






7. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-47 for moreinformation.




Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageFor vehicles equipped with aninstrument panel storage area, it islocated above the glove box.

Access the storage area bypressing and holding in the driverside of the handle and pull out onthe exposed portion of the handle.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersIf equipped, there are cupholders onthe center console and the rear ofthe center console, also in the rearseat armrest.

Pull the cover down on the rear ofthe center console to access thecupholders in the rear of the centerconsole.

Pull the rear seat armrest down toaccess the cupholders.

Armrest StorageVehicles with a rear seat armresthave two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.


4-2 Storage

Center Console StorageVehicles with an upper and lowercenter console storage area havecupholders included.

Pull the lever (A) up to access theupper storage area. Raise the upperstorage bin, then pull the lever (B)up to access the lower storage area.Use the key to lock and unlock thelower storage area.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-24Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-25StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-25Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-25

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-38Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-38Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-40Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-41Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-43Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-54Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextfavorite radio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x (Previous/End): Press togo to the previous favorite radiostation, track on a CD, or folder on



an iPod® or USB device. Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD/DVD

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System)

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw , or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System):

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw , or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Main Audio Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orc /xto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orc /x tomove quickly through the tracks.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Music Navigator Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orc /xto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orc /x tomove quickly through the trackswithin the selected category.



3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems. See Bluetoothon page 7-49 and OnStar Overviewon page 14-1 for more information.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for moreinformation.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM®.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep isheard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

While listening to a CD/DVD, pressand hold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The front wiper control is located onthe turn and lane-change lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turnto8 , then release. For several

wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.



6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-34.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of themultifunction lever, to spray washerfluid on the windshield. The wipersclear the window and then eitherstop or return to the preset speed.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long-distance,cross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays. Or, if the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem untilCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC. Or, if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem for

two seconds to select the nextavailable variance zone. Repeatthis step until the appropriatevariance zone is displayed.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be a

strong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, or seats duringthe calibration procedure.



2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays. Or, if the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem untilCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration. Or,if the vehicle does not have DICbuttons, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem fortwo seconds to start thecompass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

Clock

AM-FM Radio and AM‐FMRadio with CD Player

To set the clock:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpress the O button to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button until the hournumbers begin to flash, thenturn the f knob to increase ordecrease the hour.

3. Press the H button until theminute numbers begin to flash,then turn the f knob to increaseor decrease the minutes.

4. Press the H button until the12HR or 24HR time formatbegins to flash, then turn the fknob to change the time format.

5. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayed

time, or wait until the flashingstops after five seconds and thecurrent time displayedautomatically sets.

MP3 Radios with a Single CDor a Single CD and DVD Player

To adjust the time and date:


2. Press the H button to displayHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to changethat setting.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD button.



. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK button.

. Press thes REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and then thesoftkey located below theforward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, thedate MM/DD (month and day),and DD/MM (day and month)displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press the H button again toapply the desired option, or letthe screen time out.

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CDPlayer

To set the time and date:


2. Press the MENU button andthen the softkey under the H tabto display HR, MIN, MM, DD,YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to changethat setting.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK button.

. Press thes REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day to day/month:

1. Press the MENU button andthen the softkey under theH tab.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H,the date MM/DD (month andday), and DD/MM (day andmonth) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

4. Press the MENU button again toapply the desired option, or letthe screen time out.



Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,or may have one accessory poweroutlet and one cigarette lighter. Thecigarette lighter is designed to fitonly in the receptacle closest to thedriver.

There may be another accessorypower outlet in the rear cargo area.If the vehicle has a floor console,there is an accessory power outletinside the storage bin and one onthe rear of the floor console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use

power outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overload

vehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-96.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready for use, the lighter popsback out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heating



element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysThe vehicle may have a frontashtray located near the center ofthe instrument panel. Pull on thedoor to open it. The ashtray mayhave a cigarette lighter.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, open thedoor and pull the ashtray bin towardyou. To replace the ashtray, insertthe ashtray bin inside the ashtraydoor and press down until itengages.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Light Duty Premium Shown. Metric, Uplevel, Base and Heavy Duty Similar.



For vehicles with a DURAMAX®

Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®

Diesel Supplement for moreinformation.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Engine Hour Meter Display

The Driver Information Center (DIC)can also display the number ofhours the engine has run. To displaythe engine hours, turn the ignitionoff, then press and hold the resetbutton for at least four seconds. Thehour meter displays for up to30 seconds, or until the ignition is

turned on. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-28 for moreinformation.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

Press the reset button, located onthe instrument panel cluster next tothe voltmeter, to toggle between thetrip odometer and the regularodometer. Holding the reset buttonfor approximately one second whilethe trip odometer is displayed willreset it.

To display the odometer readingwith the ignition off, press the resetbutton.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-28 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). For a description of howGrade Braking affects vehicle speedwhile the Tow/Haul Mode isactivated, see Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9-37 for more information.



Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel thevehicle has left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe vehicle should be filled soon.

Here are some situations customersmay experience with the fuel gauge.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.



Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonecan be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or some other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check the

oil as soon as possible. See EngineOil Messages on page 5-40 andEngine Oil on page 10-6.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.




Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugereads 100°C (210°F) or less.If pulling a load or going up hills, itis normal for the temperature tofluctuate and go over the 113°C(235°F) mark. If the gauge reachesthe 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is workingbeyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10-20.

Voltmeter Gauge

This gauge indicates the batteryvoltage when the ignition isturned on.

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This is



normal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light onpage 5-20 for more information. Thevoltmeter gauge may also readlower when in fuel economy mode.This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle may continue several times if

the driver remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-32.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt warning light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. This



cycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensing

and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3-22.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflate

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

without a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-43.

Airbag On-Off LightIf the vehicle has an airbag on-offswitch, it also has a passengerairbag status indicator located in theoverhead console.



United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, will light for severalseconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator ON or OFF, or eitherthe on or off symbol, will light to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

When the right front passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch in the glovebox, the indicator light OFF or theoff symbol will come on and stay onas a reminder that the airbag hasbeen turned off. This light will go offwhen the airbag has been turnedon. See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3-29 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States

Canada and Mexico



{ Warning

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there.

Do not turn off the passengerairbag unless the person sittingthere is in a risk group identifiedby the national government. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch onpage 3-29 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.


If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate). See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3-29 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or the airbagon-off switch. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position unlessthere is an airbag off switch locatedin the glove box. If there is anairbag off switch, the vehicle doesnot have a passenger sensingsystem. See Airbag On-Off Switchon page 3-29.

The passenger airbag statusindicator is on the overheadconsole. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-32 for importantsafety information.



In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,

or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-17 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.



The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-37 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comes

on when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-23.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.



This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-71. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,

or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-68.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This can

happen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

The vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop the

vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on and achime sounds, there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10-25 for more information.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it is ready to warn if there isa problem.



{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to pushor might go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-89.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-23.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5-38 forall brake related DIC messages.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

For vehicles equipped with thefour-wheel-drive light, it comes onwhen a vehicle with a manualtransfer case is shifted intofour-wheel drive and the front axleengages.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.



See Four-Wheel Drive on page 9-40for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

Press and release the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakbutton to turn off TCS, and amessage displays in the DIC.

Press and briefly hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn off theStabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrakOff light comes on and a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theStabiliTrak/TCS system and theindicator light turns off.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56, and Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5-42 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on orstays on, have the vehicle servicedby the dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightturns off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, and a messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-42 for more information.



If the light flashes while driving, thismeans that StabiliTrak or TCS isassisting in controlling the vehicle.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-43. Stop as soon as

possible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-56.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-59.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.



Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under the fuel gauge,comes on briefly while the engine isbeing started.

This light and a chime, if the vehicleis equipped with a radio, comes onwhen the fuel tank is low on fuel.The Driver Information Center alsodisplays a FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-41 for moreinformation. When fuel is added thislight and message should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or moreof the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-10.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.



Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-6 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles equipped with cruisecontrol, this light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-59 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The DIC displays information aboutthis vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located below thetachometer in the instrument panelcluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel. If the vehicle does



not have DIC buttons, the tripodometer reset stem can be used toaccess some of the menu items.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46 for more information.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer,transmission temperature, andinstantaneous economy and ActiveFuel Management™ indicator. Thecompass and outside temperaturewill also be shown in the display.

The temperature will be shown in °Cor °F depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings forvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), trailerbrake gain and output informationfor vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,engine hours, compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5-46 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.



Trip/Fuel Menu Items (with DICButtons)

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles. Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display theodometer.

To switch between metric andEnglish measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles since thelast reset for the trip odometer.Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also display the tripodometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/resetbutton while the trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset thetrip odometer while it is displayed bypressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles driven sincethe ignition was last turned on andthe vehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature is

activated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining kilometers (km) or milesthe vehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce different



fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset AVGECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELUSED displays. This display showsthe number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Timer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display can beused as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes, and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Instantaneous Economy andActive Fuel Management™Indicator

If the vehicle has this display, pressthe trip/fuel button until INST ECONV8 displays. This display shows thecurrent fuel economy at a particularmoment and will change frequentlyas driving conditions change. Thisdisplay shows the instantaneousfuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). Unlike averageeconomy, this screen cannot bereset.



An Active Fuel Managementindicator displays on the right sideof the DIC, while INST ECONdisplays on the left side. Active FuelManagement allows the engine tooperate on either four or eightcylinders, depending on drivingdemands. When Active FuelManagement is active, V4 willdisplay on the DIC. When ActiveFuel Management is inactive, V8will display. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-31 formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems (with DIC Buttons)

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows an

estimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-40. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10-6. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has just

been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select betweenMETRIC or ENGLISH units. All ofthe vehicle information will then bedisplayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONTTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle



information button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd pressure in a specific tire willappear in the display. See TirePressure on page 10-56 and TireMessages on page 5-43 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,the trailer brake display appears inthe DIC. Press the vehicleinformation button until TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.

To adjust trailer gain see “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9-84 formore information.

Battery

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read BATTERY 13 VOLTS.Your vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof the battery. The battery voltagemay fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal.

Oil Pressure

This display shows the oil pressurein either kilopascals (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi).

Engine Hours

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil ENGINE HOURS displays. Thisdisplay shows the total number ofhours the engine has run.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5-5 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5-5 for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (with DIC Buttons)

Use the trip odometer reset stem toview the odometer and tripodometer. The Language selectionand Engine Hours display can alsobe accessed with the trip odometerreset stem.

Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil ODOMETER displays. Thisdisplay shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP displays. This displayshows the current distance traveledin either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset for thetrip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.


To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles). Asthe vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Language

This display allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.

3. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available selections areENGLISH (default),FRANCAIS (French),ESPANOL (Spanish), and NOCHANGE.

4. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set thechoice.



Engine Hours

To display the ENGINE HOURS,place the ignition in LOCK/OFF orACC/ACCESSORY, then press andhold the trip odometer reset stem forfour seconds while viewing theODOMETER. This display showsthe total number of hours the enginehas run.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (without DICButtons)

Language

This display allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.

3. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default),FRANCAIS (French),ESPANOL (Spanish), and NOCHANGE.

4. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set thechoice.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP displays. This displayshows the current distance traveledin either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset for thetrip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.


To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles). Asthe vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.



Transmission Temperature

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,the trailer brake display appears inthe DIC. Press the trip odometerreset stem until TRAILER GAIN andOUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.

To adjust trailer gain see “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9-84 formore information.

Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Battery

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read BATTERY 13 VOLTS.Your vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof the battery. The battery voltagemay fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal.

Oil Pressure

This display shows the oil pressurein either kilopascals (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi).

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5-5 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5-5 for more information.

Oil Life

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.



When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-40. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10-6. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset) or the tripodometer reset stem.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimes willsound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5-20. Drivingwith this problem could drain the



battery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-23. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKES SOON

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe brake system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart the

vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service. See yourdealer.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimemay sound when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turn theignition back on. If this message stilldisplays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See yourdealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-84 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the driver door is notfully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.



LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN(Crew Cab)

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the driver side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the front passengerdoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN(Crew Cab)

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the passenger siderear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, check

the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessagesNotice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10-20.

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) TURNED OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5-15. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns to

normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-15.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10-22 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stop



and turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10-9 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10-6 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stop

and allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-15.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10-6 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10-6.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimemay sound when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10-20for more information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge on page 5-13 and Fuelon page 9-68 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-21. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9-71. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9-62 formore information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display. Toturn the URPA system back on, seeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-62.



SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9-62 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56 for more information.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may come on if theStabiliTrak system has not fullyinitialized because of roadconditions or the incorrect tire size.When the StabiliTrak system is fullyinitialized, the message will turn off.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56 for more information.If this message continues to bedisplayed for multiple ignition cyclesand on different road surfaces, seeyour dealer for service.

TRACTION XXSTABILITRAK XX

This message displays when thetraction control and/or StabiliTraksystems have been turned on or off.Adjust your driving accordingly. Tolimit wheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on.However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock the vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-13. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9-56.



STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-23.

. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-17 andAirbag System on page 3-22 formore information.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-11 for moreinformation.

Starting the VehicleMessages

FAST IDLE ON

If your vehicle has this feature, thismessage displays when the fast idlefeature is on. See Fast Idle Systemon page 9-27 for more information.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5-26. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-59 formore information. If the warning



comes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10-62,Tire Rotation on page 10-63, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10-58, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-56 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays LEFT FRT (left front),RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)to indicate the location of the low

tire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-26. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10-47, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-56. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-28.

Transmission Messages

GRADE BRAKING DISABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been disabledwith the tow/haul mode button onthe end of the shift lever.

See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37,Automatic Transmission onpage 9-32, and Cruise Control onpage 9-59.

GRADE BRAKING ENABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been enabledwith the tow/haul mode button onthe end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-32, andCruise Control on page 9-59.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when thegrade braking has been activatedwhile driving on downhill grades.This message will only appear thefirst time the feature is activated inan ignition cycle. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9-37, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-32, andCruise Control on page 9-59.



SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVE

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Make sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least one minuteand then restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: Do not drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument cluster and/orDIC, or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:. A trailer with electric brakes

becomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-84 for moreinformation.



ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle.

This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN/OUTPUT display appears inthe DIC.

See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-28 and “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9-84 formore information.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10-23 for more information.

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons)The vehicle may have customizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to onepreferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on the vehicle. Onlythe options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.



To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, turn the headlamps off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following customization featuresallow you to program settings to thevehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-28 for more information.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-7 for moreinformation.



Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to turn offthe automatic door unlockingfeature. It also allows you to selectwhich doors and when the doors will

automatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2-7 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback received whenlocking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback whenlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter if the doors are open.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2 formore information.



Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback received whenunlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-2 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

On vehicles with a crew cab, thisfeature turns the delayed door lockson or off. When locking the doorswith the power door lock switch anda door is open, this feature willdelay locking the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2-7 formore information.



Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select ifthe exterior lights turn on brieflyduring low light periods afterunlocking the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds, until the lock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed,or until the vehicle is no longer off.



See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-2 formore information.



CHIME VOLUME

If available, this feature allows youto select the volume level of thechime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select if the outsidemirror(s) will automatically tilt downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrorson page 2-16 for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT RECALL

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3-8 for more information.



Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT RECALL appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: Noautomatic seat exit recall will occur.The recall will only occur afterpressing the easy exit seat button.

BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): Ifthe features are enabled through theEASY EXIT SETUP menu, thedriver seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition orthe easy exit seat button is pressed.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



EASY EXIT SETUP

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select which areas willrecall with the automatic easy exitseat feature. It also allows you toturn off the automatic easy exitfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3-8 and EASY EXIT RECALLearlier for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SETUP appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit willrecall.

SEAT ONLY (default): The driverseat will recall.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3-8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat and, on somevehicles, the outside mirrors willautomatically move to the storeddriving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless



Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.On some vehicles with theadjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, the pedals will alsoautomatically move.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-4 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.



If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming. Theprogrammed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” inthis section.



Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressthe two outside buttons at thesame time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. In the garage, locate the garagedoor opener receiver(motor-head unit). Find the“Learn” or “Smart” button. It canusually be found where thehanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing a



different function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, thegarage door opener is probably aFixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, thegarage door opener is a FixedCode unit. If you do not see arow of dip switches, return to theprevious section forProgramming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code.

Your hand-held transmitter canhave between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.



The garage door opener receiver(motor head unit) could alsohave a row of dip switches thatcan be used when programmingthe Universal Home Remote.If the total number of switcheson the motor head andhand-held transmitter aredifferent, or if the dip switchsettings are different, use the dipswitch settings on the motorhead unit to program theUniversal Home Remote. Themotor head dip switch settingscan also be used when theoriginal hand-held transmitter isnot available.

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do in theexamples above, but theyshould be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as Up,+, or On.

. A switch in the downposition could be labeled asDown, −, or Off.

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled asMiddle, 0, or Neutral.

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”. If a switch is set between

the up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 2 nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.



3. From inside your vehicle, firstfirmly press all three buttons atthe same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)

B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,or Neutral)

C. Right Button (Down, −,or Off)

4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switch settingfrom Step 2 into your vehicle'sUniversal Home Remote. Youwill have two and one-halfminutes to complete Step 4. Nowpress one button on theUniversal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of the switchpositions, once again firmlypress and release all threebuttons at the same time. Theindicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garage

door moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what was usedfor the garage door opener.



Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code settings on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin toblink, release both buttons. Thecodes from all buttons will beerased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13-3.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Roof Marker Lamps

(If Equipped)

When the vehicle is turned off andthe headlamps are in AUTO, theheadlamps may automaticallyremain on for a set time. The time ofthe delay can be changed using theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-28.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

. Roof Marker Lamps(If Equipped)

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Roof Marker Lamps (If

Equipped)

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

Push the turn signal lever towardthe instrument panel to change theheadlamps from low beam tohigh beam.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from low tohigh beam.

Pull the lever toward you andrelease it to return to low-beamheadlamps.


Lighting 6-3

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on the

instrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, off will only work whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease it. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.


6-4 Lighting

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel which regulates when theautomatic headlamps turn on. Donot cover the sensor, otherwise theheadlamps will come on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or heavy overcastweather. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp systems so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automatic

headlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is brightenough outside. During that delay,the instrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-7.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe control to the off position.

The headlamps will also stay onafter you exit the vehicle. Thisfeature can be programmed usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5-46.

If the vehicle is not equipped withDIC buttons, exit lighting isautomatic. When it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps remainon for 30 seconds after the ignitionis moved from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

For vehicles without a radio, theinstrument panel light remains on for30 seconds with the driver doorclosed. For vehicles with a radio,the instrument panel light remainson for 10 minutes with the driverdoor closed. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-27.

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are


Lighting 6-5

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more than

one second will cause the turnsignals to flash until you release thelever.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10-40.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal, if the vehicle has a radio.The message TURN SIGNAL ONwill also appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). To turnthe chime and message off, movethe turn signal lever to the offposition.


6-6 Lighting

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located next to the exteriorlamp control on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted LampIf the vehicle has this feature, thisbutton includes wiring provisions fora dealer or a qualified service centerto install an auxiliary roof lamp.

This button is on the overheadconsole.

When the wiring is connected to anauxiliary roof-mounted lamp,pressing the bottom of the buttonwill activate the lamp and illuminatean indicator light at the bottom ofthis button. Pressing the top of thebutton will turn off the roof-mountedlamp and indicator.

The emergency roof lamp circuit isfused at 30 amps, so the totalcurrent draw of the attached lampsshould be less than this value. Theattachment points for the roof lampcircuits are two blunt cut wireslocated above the overheadconsole, a dark green switchedpower wire and a black ground wire.

For more information on roof mountemergency lamp installation, pleasevisit the GM Upfitter website atwww.gmupfitter.com or contact yourdealer.

If the vehicle has this button, thevehicle may have the snow plowprep package. See Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment onpage 9-96.


Lighting 6-7

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): This feature controlsthe brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

Push the knob to extend out andthen it can be turned.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights. Turningthe knob to the farthest clockwiseposition turns on the dome lamps.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamps come on byturning the instrument panelbrightness control knob to thefarthest clockwise position. Thisknob is located on the instrumentpanel and also turns on the domelamps.

The cargo lamps can be used ifmore light is needed in the cargoarea of the vehicle.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located below thedome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k (Dome Off): Press the buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.


6-8 Lighting

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lamps,they are located on the overheadconsole.

To turn on the reading lamps, pressthe button located next to eachlamp. To turn them off, press thebutton again.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. To turn thelamps on or off, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp.

If the vehicle has a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system, pressthe lamp lenses to turn the lamps onor off.

The lamps are fixed and cannot beadjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When the doors are opened, thedome lamps will come on if thedome override button is in theextended position. If the domeoverride button is pressed in, thelamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.They turn off automatically in20 seconds. The lights do not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and state

of charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltagemoving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,


Lighting 6-9

climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5-37.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps, if they are left on formore than 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. The cargolamp shuts off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents the battery fromrunning down.


6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-3Overview (Radio withCD (MP3)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Overview (Radio with USB, CD,and DVD (MP3)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-16Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-16

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9-3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.

See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-27 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the navigation manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.



Overview (AM-FM Radio)

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

A. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

B. Buttons 1 - 6. Saves and selects favorite

stations.

C. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass ortreble.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

D. BAND. Press to scroll through the

available bands AM, FM,or XM if equipped.

E. © SEEK

. Seeks the previous station.

F. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

G. P (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

H. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clock.



I. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer settings.

J. x w (Fade/Balance)

. Press to set the fade andbalance.

Overview (Radio with CD (MP3))

Overview (Radio with CD (MP3))

A. 4 (Information)


B. FAV (Favorites Pages). Press to scroll through the

favorite pages.



C. MENU. Press to open the tone

menu to adjust the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

D. Buttons 1 - 6. Saves and selects favorite

stations.

E. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer.

F. f (Tone/Tune)



G. CAT (Category). Press to display a list of

XM categories.

H. H (Clock)


I. BAND. Press to scroll through the


J. © SEEK


K. ¨ SEEK


L. P (Power/Volume)



M. s REV (Reverse)

. Press to and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

N. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press to and hold to fastforward through a track.

O. CD/AUX. Press to scroll through

selecting the CD or aauxiliary device.

P. Z Eject

. Press to eject theloaded CD.



Overview (Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3))

Overview (Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3))

A. 4 (Information)


B. FAV (Favorites Pages). Press to scroll through the

favorite pages.

C. MENU. Press to open the tone

menu to adjust the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

D. DVD Slot

E. Buttons 1 - 6. Saves and selects favorite

stations.

F. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer settings.

G. f (Tone/Tune)



H. Z DVD

. Press to eject theloaded DVD.



I. CAT (Category). Press to display a list of

XM categories.

J. H (Clock)


K. BAND. Press to scroll through the


L. © SEEK


M. ¨ SEEK


N. P (Power/Volume)



O. CD Slot

P. s REV (Reverse)

. Press to and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

Q. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press to and hold to fastforward through a track.

R. Z CD

. Press to eject theloaded CD.

S. DVD/CD/AUX. Press to scroll through

selecting the DVD, CD,or an auxiliary device.

Operation

Radios with CD and DVD

Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVDradio have a Bose® SurroundSound System. Some of its featuresare explained later in this section,“Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade).”

Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVDradio may have a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7-38 for moreinformation on the vehicle's RSEsystem.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The player iscapable of reading theDTS-programmed DVD Audio orDVD Video media. (DTS and DTSDigital Surround are registeredtrademarks of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.)

Dolby and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.



4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio andAM-FM Radio with CD): Press toswitch the display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time. Press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS orXM station; or CD, MP3, or WMAsong. If information is availableduring XM, CD, MP3, or WMAplayback, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV)automatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle's speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation. Thedisplay times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)(AM-FM Radio and AM-FMRadio with CD)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.



Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radioand AM-FM Radio with CD)

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press` or press the f knobuntil the speaker control labeldisplays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked or Loc: One of thesemessages will display when theTHEFTLOCK® system has lockedup the radio. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

For radios with the Radio DataSystem (RDS) feature, it only workswith FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters will display. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of the



display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectradio stations.

© SEEK: Press to seek theprevious radio station. Press andhold for a few seconds until a beepsounds to scan for radio stations indescending order; press the ©SEEK button again to stop scanningradio stations. The radio only seeksand scans stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

For the AM-FM Radio, press andhold the © SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds to scanthe preset stations. The stationfrequency flashes while the radio isin the scan mode.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek the nextradio station. Press and hold for afew seconds until a beep sounds toscan for radio stations in ascendingorder; press the ¨ SEEK buttonagain to stop scanning radiostations. The radio only seeks andscans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

For the AM-FM Radio, press andhold the ¨ SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds to scanthe preset stations. The stationfrequency flashes while the radio isin the scan mode.

s REV: Press to manually tune toa radio station in descending order.

\ FWD: Press to manually tune toa radio station in ascending order.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorites pages for storedradio stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to store theradio station while the vehicle isparked; see Defensive Driving onpage 9-3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites. Up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the FAV button.Press the FAV button to go throughup to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped,stations.

Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets. Up to 18 stations (6 FM1,6 FM2, and 6 AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.



Setting Preset Stations

To store presets:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons forthree seconds until a beepsounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixsoftkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadian

provinces. SiriusXM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the SiriusXM service. If theservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew on channel XM1.”For more information, contactSiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com orcall 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

4 (Information) (SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service): For vehicles withSiriusXM, press 4 to displayadditional text information related tothe current SiriusXM channel.If information is available, the songtitle information displays on the topline of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” displays.



Finding a Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan SiriusXM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious SiriusXM channel.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextSiriusXM channel.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious SiriusXM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextSiriusXM category.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorites pages for storedradio stations.

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find SiriusXM channelswhen the radio is in the XM mode.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbuttons.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstSiriusXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or nextSiriusXM station in the selectedcategory, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory to add or remove.

4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.



Storing SiriusXM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeSiriusXM channels while the vehicleis parked; see Defensive Driving onpage 9-3. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM,or SiriusXM, if equipped, stations.

Storing an SiriusXM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an SiriusXM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixsoftkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

SiriusXM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-866-635-2349 (US) or1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theSiriusXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour SiriusXM subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:The SiriusXM subscription needs tobe reactivated. Contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or call1-866-635-2349 (U.S) andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The SiriusXMreceiver in the vehicle could havepreviously been in another vehicle.For security purposes, SiriusXMreceivers cannot be swappedbetween vehicles. If this message isreceived after having the vehicleserviced, check with your dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theSiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Check XM Receiver: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there is



interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some static canoccur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

SiriusXM® Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tighten byhand until fully seated plusone quarter turn.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system(if equipped) may be affected if thesunroof is open.



Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep

the CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Inserting a CD(s) (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

LOAD^ : Press to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holdsup to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the LOADbutton.

2. Wait for the message to insertthe disc.



3. Load a CD. Insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the LOAD buttonfor two seconds. A beep soundsand Load All Discs displays.

2. Wait for the message on when toinsert the discs. The CD playertakes up to six CDs.

3. Press the LOAD button again tocancel loading more CDs.

Ejecting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Ejecting a CD (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc that is currentlyplaying. Remove the CD whenRemove Disc displays. If the disc isnot removed, after several secondsthe disc is automatically pulled backinto the player.

To eject all CDs, press and hold theZ EJECT button for two seconds.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7-47 for moreinformation.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press tocycle between CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number will displaywhen a CD is in the player. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice; see Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-33 for more information. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.



4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FMRadio with CD, press and releasethe RPT button to repeat the currenttrack. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icon disappearsfrom the display.

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

For the Radio with USB andSix-Disc CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays toplay tracks from all CDs loadedin random order.

2. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to playtracks from a single CD inrandom order.

3. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.



MP3‐Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3), Radiowith USB and CD (MP3), and Radiowith USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3)have the capability of playing anMP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.



File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than 32characters or 4 pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists reated using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist‐editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEKbutton, or the ¨ SEEK button. AnMP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has beenrecorded without using file folderscan be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Playing an MP3

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.



Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.


For the Radio with USB andSix-Disc CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays toplay tracks from all CDs loadedin random order.

2. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to playtracks from a single CD inrandom order.


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playthe files in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album in



alphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3s from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

CD/DVD Player

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a disc.It could get caught in the CD orDVD player. If a disc is recorded ona personal computer and adescription label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded discwith a marking pen.

The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners isnot advised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the opticswith lubricants internal to the CDand DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, thesound quality can be reduced due toCD-R or CD-RW quality, the methodof recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of the



disc. If the surface of a disc isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the disc does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a disc whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Audio Output

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time.An audio source is defined as DVDslot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, frontauxiliary jack, USB port, or rearauxiliary jack.

Press the O button to turn the radioon. The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listen tothe radio (AM, FM, or XM ifequipped) by pressing the BANDbutton or the DVD/CD AUX button toselect CD slot, DVD slot, frontauxiliary input, USB port, or rearauxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack,USB port, or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from thissource through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-33, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7-47 formore information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into either slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc should begin playing.(Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.)

Ejecting a Disc

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The CD ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.



If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a CD (in Either theDVD or CD Slot)

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7-47 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks(the upper slot is the DVD deck andthe lower slot is the CD deck) of theradio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text tabDVD or CD symbol displays on theleft side of the radio display. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-33 for moreinformation. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”

If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAuxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (ifavailable). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-33 or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.



f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe disc that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD haveplayed.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than five seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.


MP3 and WMA Supported Files

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.

The CD player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressd audio is playedbefore MP3/WMA files. Press theCAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.

The CD player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.



. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cdafile extension.

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the rootdirectory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functiondoes not function on a disc that was

recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last

track of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.



Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the file name do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists that werecreated using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treated asspecial folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3 or WMA (inEither the DVD or CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than five secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times, if less thanfive seconds have played, tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playfiles in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing is



shown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs from

that album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or by thebuttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7-47 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDsand CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD+R/RW media, along with MP3 andWMA formats.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen or the radio, see “DVDDisplay Error Messages” underRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7-38, and “CD/DVDPlayer Messages” later in thissection for more information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into the topslot, label side up. The player pullsit in and the disc should beginplaying. “Loading Disc” shows onthe radio display. At the same time,the radio displays a softkey menu ofoption(s). Some discs automaticallyplay the movie while others defaultto the softkey menu display, whichrequires the Play, Enter,or Navigation softkeys to bepressed, either by softkey or by therear seat passenger using theremote control.



Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds fora DVD.

Ejecting a Disc

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for an

auxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7-33 for moreinformation. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary (ifavailable). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in Auxiliary Devices onpage 7-33 or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.

O (Power): Press to turn the radioon or off. Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume. Press andhold for more than two seconds toturn off the entire radio and RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) systemand to start the Parental Controlfeature. Parental Control preventsthe rear seat occupant fromoperating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display. The Parental Controlfeature remains on until the knob ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds again, or until thedriver turns the ignition off and exitsthe vehicle.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks ona CD or DVD.

© SEEK: Press to return to the startof the current track or chapter.Press again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button might



not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast reversing, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast forwarding, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V(Video)

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-V playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe Play or Pause tab displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.If the forward arrow is showing onthe display, the system is in pausemode. If the Pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screenis off, press the play button to turnthe screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD does notbegin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeylocated under the play/pausesymbol tag displayed on the radio.

If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions,if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys located under thenavigation arrows to navigate thecursor through the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.



The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information. Thevideo screen automatically turns onwhen the DVD-V is inserted into theDVD slot, and does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat occupant through theremote control power button.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A(Audio)

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-A playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.If the forward arrow is showing on

the display, the system is in pausemode. If the pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press to cyclethrough audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc. Thevideo screen shows the audiostream changing.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information. Thevideo screen automatically turns onwhen the DVD-V is inserted into theDVD slot, and does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.

It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat occupant through theremote control power button.

Stopping and ResumingPlayback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, press the cbutton on the remote control,or press the softkey located underthe c or the r / j tabs displayedon the radio. If the radio is sourcedto something other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX button tomake DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press ther / j button on the remote control,or press the softkey located underthe r / j tab on the radio. The DVDshould resume play from where itlast stopped if the disc has not beenejected and the stop button has notbeen pressed twice on the remotecontrol. If the disc has been ejectedor the stop button has been pressed



twice on the remote control, the discresumes playing at the beginning ofthe disc.

CD/DVD Player Messages

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ or DVD/CD AUX button ispressed on the radio.

Optical Error: This messagedisplays if the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: This messagedisplays if a disc was inserted withan invalid or unknown format.

Player Error: This messagedisplays if there are disc load ordisc eject problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CD/DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radio

displays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9-3 formore information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, press



the radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audio

player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle throughDVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CDtext tab and a message showingtrack or chapter number will displaywhen a disc is in either slot. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays. If a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot, theDVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary (ifavailable). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in this section, or “Audio/

Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7-38 for more information.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Playeron page 7-17 or CD/DVD Player onpage 7-23 for information about howto connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Support

The USB connector is located onthe instrument panel or in the centerconsole, and uses the USB 2.0standard.

USB-Supported Devices. USB flash drive. Portable USB hard drive. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nano®

. iPod touch®



. iPod classic®

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB-Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders. Up to eight folders in depth. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension

. AAC files stored on an iPod

. FAT16

. FAT32

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console or onthe instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console or on the instrumentpanel. If the vehicle is on and theUSB connection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPod

appears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkey belowj to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.



. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C , or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.



> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. TheRSE system includes a radio with aDVD player, a video display screen,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See CD/DVD Player on page 7-23for more information on the vehicle'sCD/DVD player.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system mightnot work until the temperature is

within the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −20°C (−4°F) or below60°C (140°F). If the temperature ofthe vehicle is outside this range,heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon which radio the vehicle has. Tostart Parental Control, press andhold the radio power button for morethan two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),DVD, and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icondisplays.

The radio can be turned back onwith a single press of the powerbutton, but the RSE system willremain under Parental Control.

To turn Parental Control off, pressand hold the radio power button formore than two seconds. The RSE



returns from where it was previouslyleft and the padlock icon disappearsfrom the radio display.

Parental Control can also be turnedoff by inserting or ejecting any disc,pressing the play icon on the radioDVD display menu, or changing anignition position.

Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated toRear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.These headphones can be used tolisten to the radio, CDs, DVDs,MP3s, DVD-As, or any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks orthe auxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light comes on, but thereis intermittent sound and/or static onthe headphones, or if the indicatorlight does not come on, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information. Switchthe headphones to Off when notin use.

Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the overhead console.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off, or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If youmove too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones losethe audio signal.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception. Thesymbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.



Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads attached to theheadphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1-888-293-3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

Yellow: Video Input

White: Left Audio Input

Red: Right Audio Input

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment.

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audio orvideo signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not included)may be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX



(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The audio of theconnected source can be listened toover the speakers by sourcing theradio to the auxiliary device or bysourcing the RSA to the Rear Auxand listening with the wirelessheadphones on Channel 2 or withthe wired headphones. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack” underAuxiliary Devices on page 7-33 formore information about changingthe source.

Changing the RSE Video ScreenSettings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu. To change any feature:

1. Press the z (display menu)button on the remote control.

2. Use the remote control n,q,p,o (navigation) arrows andther (enter) button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the z button again toremove the setup menu from thescreen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following possiblesources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle-wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7-47 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.



2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its lockedposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on. This is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Use the remote control power buttonor eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The overhead console contains theinfrared transmitters for the wirelessheadphones and the infraredreceivers for the remote control.They are located at the rear of theconsole.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreens” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe RSE overhead console andpress the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remotecontrol does not seem to beworking, the batteries might need tobe replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O (power)button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The radio can also turn on thevideo screen display. See Operationon page 7-7 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses acode set of Toshiba®.



Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button toturn the video screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this buttonto turn the remote control backlighton. The backlight automaticallytimes out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press this button toreturn the DVD to the main menu ofthe DVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this buttonto access the DVD menu. The DVDmenu is different on every DVD.Use the navigation arrows to movethe cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press theenter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.

n,q, p,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button toselect the choice that is highlightedin any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press thisbutton to adjust the brightness,screen display mode (normal, full,or zoom), and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press this button toexit the current active menu andreturn to the previous menu. Thisbutton operates only when thedisplay menu or a DVD menu isactive.

c (Stop): Press this button to stopplaying, fast reversing, or fastforwarding a DVD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press thisbutton to start playing a DVD. Pressthis button while a DVD is playing topause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

While the DVD is playing, the DVDcan be played slowly by pressingthe play/pause button then pressingthe fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow playmode. Also, reverse can be playedslowly by pressing the play/pausebutton and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow playmode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press this button to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressthis button to go to the beginning ofthe next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work while theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.



r (Fast Reverse): Press thisbutton to quickly reverse the DVD orCD. To stop fast reversing a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release the fast reversebutton. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press thisbutton to fast forward the DVD orCD. To stop fast forwarding a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release the fast forwardbutton. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press this button tochange audio tracks on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button toturn on or off subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto switch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

2 (Camera): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDsthat have this feature while a DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressthis button to select chapter or tracknumbers greater than nine. Pressthis button before entering thenumber.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries, do the following:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure theyare installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of theremote control.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between theremote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on the radio that is in thevehicle. The video screen candisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whenEJECT or DVD AUX is pressed onthe radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile faxmachines, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.



Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen,use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allow therear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or otherauxiliary sources. However, the rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controland listen to a CD through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The radio functionality is controlledby both the RSA and the front radio.Only one band can be tuned to atone time. Changing the band on theRSA or the front radio will changethe band on the other system,if they are both sourced to the radio.

The RSA functions can be usedeven while the main radio is off. Thefront audio system will display theheadphone icon when the RSA ison, and it will disappear from thedisplay when the RSA is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

Depending on the audio system, therear speakers may continue to playwhen the RSA audio is activethrough the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input

(if available), located on the frontaudio system. Turn the iPod on,then choose the front auxiliary inputwith the RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press this button toturn the RSA on or off.

Volume: To increase or decreaseheadphone volume, turn the knobslocated next to the SRCE or PROGbuttons. The left knob controls theleft headphones and the right knobcontrols the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this buttonto switch between the radio(AM-FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD,and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.



© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM,AM, or XM™ (if equipped), pressthe seek arrows to go to theprevious or to the next station orchannels and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

Press and hold either seek arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune toan individual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttons havenot been pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press theleft seek arrow to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than 10 seconds haveplayed). Press the right seek arrowto go the next track or chapter onthe disc. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press either seek arrowto perform a cursor up or down onthe menu. Hold either seek arrow toperform a cursor left or right onthe menu.

PROG (Program): Press thisbutton to go to the next preset radiostation or channel set on the mainradio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

While a CD or DVD-A disc isplaying, press this button to go tothe beginning of the CD or DVD-A.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the CD or DVD-A.

While a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press this button toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the PROG buttonto perform the menu function, Enter.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.



3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the system

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”




Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.



Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Climate Control Systems (withHeater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Climate Control Systems

Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.


8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle. The knob can bepositioned between two modes toselect a combination of thosemodes.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selected infloor mode.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents, with some air directed to thefloor vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beselected in the defog or defrostmode. When either mode isselected, the system runs the airconditioning compressor, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat outside air is on. In this modeoutside air circulates throughout thevehicle. The outside air mode can

be used with all modes, but itcannot be used with therecirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of these modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. While inrecirculation mode the windows mayfog when the weather is cold anddamp. To clear the fog, select eitherthe defog or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can beturned off by pressing the outsideair button, or by turning off theignition.



# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fanswitch is on.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

Rear Window Defogger

For vehicles with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog from the rear window.

1 (Rear): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light on the button comeson to show that the rear windowdefogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The rear window defoggerstays on for approximately

10 minutes after the button ispressed, unless the ignition isturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning off theengine.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.



Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only)With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Fan Control



Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle. Theknob can be positioned betweentwo modes to select a combinationof those modes.

Select from the following:


) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield, side window, andsecond row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.



0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents, with some air directed to thefloor vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. Fan Control

C. AUTO

D. Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Outside Air

G. Air Delivery Mode Control

H. Display

I. On/Off

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)



O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the mode button.Recirculation can be selected onceyou have selected vent or bi-levelmode. The temperature can also beadjusted using either temperaturebutton. If the air delivery mode ortemperature settings are adjustedwith the system off, the displayilluminates briefly to show thesettings and then returns to off. Thesystem can be turned back on bypressing either O, D, C,# , thedefrost or the AUTO button.

Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Controls

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system on thedriver or passenger side of thevehicle. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system is

turned off. This is possible sinceoutside air always flows through thesystem as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set torecirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increaseor decrease the cabin temperature.The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

The passenger temperature settingcan be set to match the drivertemperature setting by pressing thePASS button and turning off thePASS indicator. When thepassenger temperature setting is setdifferent than the driver setting, theindicator on the PASS buttonilluminates and both the driver sideand passenger side temperaturedisplays are shown.

When in defrost mode thepassenger temperature settingcannot be changed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Whenautomatic operation is active, thesystem controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

Use the steps below to place theentire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thedisplay changes to show thecurrent temperature(s) andAUTO is lit on the display. Thecurrent air delivery mode andfan speed are also displayed forabout five seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the airconditioning operation and airinlet are automatically controlled.The air conditioning compressormay run when the outsidetemperature is above freezing.The air inlet will normally be setto outside air. If it is hot outside,the air inlet may automaticallyswitch to the recirculate mode to



help quickly cool down the airinside the vehicle. The light onthe button comes on inrecirculation.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith a 23°C (74°F) temperaturesetting and allow about20 minutes for the system toregulate. Use the driver orpassenger temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If a temperaturesetting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,the system remains at themaximum cooling setting. If atemperature setting of 32°C (90°F) is chosen, the systemremains at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Do not cover the solar sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel near the windshield. This

sensor regulates air temperaturebased on sun load. For moreinformation on the solar sensor, see“Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delays turningthe fan on until warm air isavailable. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolanttemperature. Pressing the fanswitch overrides this delay andchanges the fan to a selectedspeed.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons to increase or decrease thefan speed.

Pressing either fan button while inautomatic control places the fanunder manual control. The fansetting remains displayed and theAUTO light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains underautomatic control.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press these buttons to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press either button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay.

Pressing either mode button whilethe system is off changes the airdelivery mode without turning thesystem on.

Pressing either mode button while inautomatic control places the modeunder manual control. The airdelivery mode setting displays andthe AUTO light turns off. The fanremains under automatic control.


) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and sidewindow outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, and



second row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents. Inthis mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some directed to the floorvents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

The passenger temperature controlcannot be activated while in defrostmode. If the PASS button ispressed, the button indicator flashesthree times and will not work. If thepassenger temperature buttons areadjusted, the driver temperatureindicator changes. The passengertemperature will not be displayed.

If vent, bi-level, or floor mode isselected again, the climate controlsystem displays the previoustemperature settings.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C)compressor on and off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

If this button is pressed when the airconditioning compressor isunavailable due to outsideconditions, the indicator flashesthree times and then turns off. If theair conditioning is on and theoutside temperature drops below a

temperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the airconditioning light turns off to showthat the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on.

The recirculation mode is reset toautomatic control at each ignitioncycle. It is used to assist indelivering cold air as quickly aspossible. The indicator light will turn



on and off when this happens.Automatic operation can beoverridden manually.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of those modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode, thewindows may fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can beturned off by pressing the outsideair button, or by turning off theignition.

; (Outside Air): Press to turn theoutside air mode on. An indicatorlight on the button comes on toshow that outside is on. Whenselected, air from outside thevehicle circulates throughout thevehicle. The recirculation modecannot be used with the outsideair mode.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Forvehicles with this feature, press toturn the defogger on or off.It automatically turns off severalminutes after it has been activated.The defogger can also be turned offby turning the engine off. Do notdrive the vehicle until all windowsare clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid

lines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Mirror: For vehicles withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed. See Power Mirrors onpage 2-14.

Sensors



The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensor,located in the headliner, measuresthe temperature of the air inside thevehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on the

front of the vehicle could cause afalse reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.

Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheels nearthe air outlets to open or close offthe airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-22Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-27Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-31

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-32Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-38

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-55

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-56Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-62Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-68Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-69California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-70Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70


9-2 Driving and Operating

E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-96

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-12.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10-23.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequired increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Tocontact the tire manufacturer formore information about the originalequipment tires, see the LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.



{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Notice: Operating the vehicle forextended periods without thefront fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Re‐attach thefront fascia air dam after off-roaddriving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitsand Tires.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.



. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9-31.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain ahead

cannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on thetransfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).



. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut, etc.– and roll over.



. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud– the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. Keep the vehicle moving toavoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.



Notice: Do not drive throughstanding water if it is deepenough to cover the wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe. Deep watercan damage the axle and othervehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the tailpipe under water. Whilethe tailpipe is under water, you willnot be able to start the engine.When going through water, thebrakes get wet, and it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,or chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a firehazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances can

cause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule for moreinformation.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-47.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot that

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, but

apply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-52.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.



. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-31.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.



{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10-71.

Rocking The Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four-Wheel DriveHigh. For vehicles with StabiliTrak®,turn the traction control part of thesystem off. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmission

wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. Recoveryhooks can be used, if the vehiclehas them. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see Towing theVehicle on page 10-89.

Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver door

open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10-47 and Tire Pressureon page 10-56.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for



the front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-76for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)



Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of yourvehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight



Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label alsocontains important informationabout your Front Axle ReserveCapacity. See “What is front axlereserve capacity, and how do I

calculate it?” under Adding aSnow Plow or Similar Equipmenton page 9-96.

{ Warning

In the case of a sudden stopor collision, things carried inthe bed of your truck couldshift forward and come intothe passenger area, injuringyou and others. If you putthings in the bed of your truck,you should make sure theyare properly secured.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear Gross

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything



else— they go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving“under Off-Road Driving onpage 9-5.

Two-Tiered Loading

Depending on the model of yourpick-up, an upper load platformcan be created by positioningthree or four 5 cm (2 inches) by15 cm (6 inches) wooden planksacross the width of the pickupbox. The planks must beinserted in the pickup boxdepressions.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle. Thezone is located in the areabetween the front of each wheelwell and the rear of each wheelwell. The center of gravity heightmust not extend above the topof the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people you



carry inside your vehicle. Besure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

* EquipmentMaximumWeight

Ladder Rackand Cargo

340 kg(750 lbs)

Cross Toolboxand Cargo

181 kg(400 lbs)

Side Boxesand Cargo

113 kg perside (250 lbsper side)

* EquipmentMaximumWeight

* The combined weight for allrail-mounted equipment shouldnot exceed 454 kg (1,000 lbs).

Loading Points

A. Primary Load Points

B. Secondary Load Areas

C. Cargo Management OptionHoles

Structural members (A) and (B) areincluded in the pick-up box design.Additional accessories should usethese load points. Depending on theaccessory design, use a spacerunder the accessory at the loadpoints to remove gap. The holes forthe Cargo Management System (C)are not intended for attachment ofaftermarket equipment. Seewww.gmupfitter.com for additionalpick-up box load bearing structuralinformation.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationA vehicle-specific Truck‐CamperLoading Information label isattached to the inside of thevehicle's glove box. This labelindicates if a slide-in campercan be carried, how much of aload the vehicle can carry, andhow to correctly spread out theload. It will help to match theright slide in camper to thevehicle.



Your dealer can help make agood vehicle-camper match andhelp determine the CargoWeight Rating (CWR).

When installing and loading aslide-in camper, check themanufacturer's instructions.

When carrying a slide-incamper, the total cargo load ofthe vehicle is the weight of thecamper, plus the following:. Everything added to the

camper after it left the factory. Everything in the camper. All the people inside

The CWR is the maximumweight of the load the vehiclecan carry. It does not include theweight of the people inside. But,use about 68 kg (150 lbs) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle's CWR.

Refer to the Truck-CamperLoading Information label in theglove box for dimensions A andB as shown in the followingillustration.

Use the rear edge of the loadfloor for measurement purposes.The recommended location forthe cargo center of gravity is atpoint C for the CWR. It is thepoint where the mass of a bodyis concentrated and,if suspended at that point, wouldbalance the front and rear.

Here is an example of propertruck and camper match:

A. Camper Center of Gravity

B. Recommended Center ofGravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carrya slide‐in camper, the total cargoload of the truck consists of themanufacturer's camper weightfigure, the weight of installedadditional camper equipment notincluded in the manufacturer'scamper weight figure, the weight



of camper cargo, and the weightof passengers in the camper.The total cargo load should notexceed the truck's cargo weightrating, and the camper's centerof gravity (A) should fall withinthe truck's recommended centerof gravity zone (B) wheninstalled.

Any accessories or otherequipment that are added to thevehicle must be weighed. Then,subtract this extra weight fromthe CWR. This extra weight mayshorten the center of gravityzone of the vehicle.

If the slide-in camper and itsload weighs less than the CWR,the center of gravity zone foryour vehicle may be larger.

Secure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of the vehicle. When thetruck‐camper is loaded, drive toa scale and weigh on the front

and on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total axle loadsshould not exceed your vehicle'sgross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certificationlabel attached to the rear edgeof the driver door. See“Certification/Tire Label” underVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15. If weight ratings areexceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights belowthe ratings.

See your dealer for moreinformation on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo WeightRating and the correct center ofgravity zone.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this



breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9-76 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

No adjustment to the pedals can bemade when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or while using cruisecontrol.

The control used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Press the bottom of the control tomove the pedals closer. Press thetop of the control to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you. Whiledriving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See MemorySeats on page 3-8.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)



will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-27 for more information.

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission onautomatic transmission vehicles.The key can be removed inLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,continue to firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-54.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.



B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

If the vehicle is equipped with aradio, a warning tone will soundwhen the driver door is opened, theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF and the key is in theignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-96.

Place the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not start ifthe clutch pedal is not all theway down.



Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear

damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer-ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.



Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:. The parking brake is set.. The brake pedal is not pressed.. The vehicle must not be moving

and the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:. To enable the Fast Idle System,

press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

When the fast idle is active, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay FAST IDLE ON.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:. Pressing the brake.. Selecting the cruise control

cancel button.. Releasing the parking brake.. Moving the transmission shift

lever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when the keyis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an



engine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord issecured to the enginecompartment fuse block with aclip. Carefully remove the wiretie that bundles the electricalplug. Do not cut theelectrical cord.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. With four-wheel drive,if the transfer case is inN (Neutral), the vehicle will befree to roll, even if the shift leveris in P (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-73.



1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9-54.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear— not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

if the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if you

can move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9-28.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl



in the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-84.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking (ManualTransmission)If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before you get out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key and release theclutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if thevehicle is pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 9-73.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-28 for more information onusing this display.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-28and Engine Exhaust on page 9-31.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, see Parking (ManualTransmission) on page 9-30.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-73.

AutomaticTransmissionVehicles with an automatictransmission have an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Thisdisplay comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the ON/RUNposition.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.



Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed AutomaticTransmission

Heavy Duty 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission Shown (Light Duty

6-Speed Similar)

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9-36.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice an

increase in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9-28 formore information.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-28 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-73.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9-28.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-13.



N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or for off-roaddriving. You might want to shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9-5.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmissions computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how the



vehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperaturechanges. During this adaptive shiftcontrol process, shifting might feeldifferent as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

When temperatures are very cold,the Allison Transmission andHydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission'sgear shifting could be delayedproviding more stable shifts until theengine warms up. Shifts could bemore noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.

M (Manual Mode): This position isavailable on vehicles with theAllison Transmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed transmission. It lets driversselect the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode onpage 9-36.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and whengoing down a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

If you manually select 2 (Second) inan automatic transmission, thetransmission will start in secondgear. You can use this feature forreducing the speed of the rearwheels when you are trying to startthe vehicle from a stop on slipperyroad surfaces.

1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic4-Speed transmission this positionreduces vehicle speed even morethan 2 (Second) without using thebrakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission does not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

For an Allison Transmission orHydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission,this position reduces vehicle speedwithout using the brakes. You canuse it for major/severe downgradesand off-road driving where thevehicle would otherwise acceleratedue to steepness of grade. Whenyou shift to 1 (First) it provides thelowest gear appropriate to currentroad speed and continues todownshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to1 (First) gear.



Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

Vehicles with a gasoline engine and6-Speed automatic transmissionhave Normal Mode Grade Brakingthat is enabled when the vehicle isstarted, but is not enabled in RangeSelection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. The first timethe system engages for eachignition key cycle, a DIC messagewill be displayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

For iother forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37and Cruise Control on page 9-59.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode(Allison® Transmission orHydra-Matic® 6-SpeedTransmission)

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control the

vehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering columnshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays next to the M,indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until



the plus/minus button located on thesteering column lever is used tochange to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

If the vehicle has an exhaust brake,it can also be used, but will notautomatically downshift thetransmission. See Exhaust Brake inthe Duramax Diesel supplement.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

If the vehicle has the AllisonTransmission, a 4-Speed automatictransmission, or the Hydra-Matic6-Speed Automatic Transmissionwith the 6.0L engine, it has a LowTraction Mode that assists in vehicleacceleration when road conditionsare slippery, such as with ice orsnow. While the vehicle is at a stop,select the second gear range usingRange Selection Mode. This willlimit torque to the wheels helping toprevent the tires from spinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

4-Speed Automatic Transmission

6-Speed Automatic Transmission

Vehicles with an automatictransmission have a Tow/HaulMode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen driving down steep hills orMountain grades, towing, or haulingheavy loads.



The selector button is located on theend of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off by pressingthe button. When the Tow/HaulMode is enabled, a light on theinstrument panel cluster willcome on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5-25 and Hill and MountainRoads on page 9-11 for moreinformation.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9-84 formore information.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking(6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9-36. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when driving

on downhill grades by using theengine and transmission to slow thevehicle.

On vehicles with a gasoline engine,to disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC message willbe displayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

On vehicles with a diesel engine.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking canbe enabled or disabled by pressingthe Tow/Haul Mode button. Use theexhaust brake and Tow/Haul Modefor maximum grade braking.

See Towing Equipment onpage 9-84 for more information.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-32 and Cruise Control onpage 9-59.

Manual Transmission

If the vehicle is equipped with amanual transmission, this is the shiftpattern.

Here is how to operate the manualtransmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youslowly press down on theaccelerator pedal.



You can shift into 1 (First) when youare going less than 30 km/h(20 mph). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inNeutral and let up on the clutch.Then press the clutch pedal backdown and shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and5 (Fifth) the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, press theclutch pedal. After the vehicle stops,shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal. If it is hard toshift, let the shift lever return toNeutral and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch againand shift into R (Reverse). Do notattempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior toshifting into R (Reverse). Thetransmission has a lock out featurewhich prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear toR (Reverse) gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Use R (Reverse), along with theparking brake, for parking thevehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ Warning

If you skip a gear whendownshifting, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Do notshift down more than one gear ata time when downshifting.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction. To get the most satisfactionout of Four-Wheel Drive, you mustbe familiar with its operation. Readthe following before usingFour-Wheel Drive. See theappropriate text for the transfer casein the vehicle.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive Low foran extended period of time maycause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low forextended periods of time.

While driving on clean dry pavementand during tight turns, you mayexperience vibration in the steeringsystem.

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®


Front Axle

The front axle engages anddisengages automatically when youshift the transfer case. Some delayfor the axle to engage or disengageis normal.

Manual Transfer Case

The transfer case shift lever is onthe floor to the right of the driver.Use this lever to shift into and out ofFour-Wheel Drive.

A Four-Wheel Drive indicator lightcomes on when you shift intofour-wheel drive and the front axleengages. See Four-Wheel-DriveLight on page 5-24.

Some delay between shifting andwhen the indicator light comes on isnormal.



Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10-89 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-89.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in four-wheel drive foran extended period of time cancause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive for extendedperiods of time.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need Four-Wheel Drive Low.It sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might chooseFour-Wheel Drive Low if you aredriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, deep snow, and while climbingor descending steep hills.



A parking brake symbol is locatednext to the N (Neutral) symbol as areminder to set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer case intoN (Neutral).



{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9-54.

N (Neutral): Shift to this settingonly when the vehicle needs to betowed. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-89 or Towing theVehicle on page 10-89.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.The front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethis setting when you need extratraction, such as on snowy or icy

roads or in most off-road situations.This setting also engages the frontaxle to help drive your vehicle. Thisis the best setting to use whenplowing snow.

You can shift from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive High toTwo-Wheel Drive High while thevehicle is moving. In extremely coldweather, it may be necessary tostop or slow the vehicle to shift intoFour-Wheel Drive High.

When Using the ManualTransfer Case. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel

Drive Low or N (Neutral) shouldbe made using quick motions toavoid excessive gear grinding.Shifting slowly may make it moredifficult to shift.

. You may notice that it is harderto shift when the vehicle is cold.After the vehicle warms up theshifting will return to normal.

. While in Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel Drive Low youmay experience reduced fueleconomy.

. Avoid driving in Four-WheelDrive on clean, dry pavement.It may cause your tires to wearfaster, make the transfer caseharder to shift, and run noisier.

. If the transfer case shifter is inthe N (Neutral) position and youhave difficulty reaching theselected transfer case mode,with the engine running, shift thetransmission momentarily toD (Drive) and then back toN (Neutral). This will realign thegear teeth in the transfer caseand allow you to complete theshift.

Shifting from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive High. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive

High and Four-Wheel Drive Highcan be made at any vehiclespeed.



. Shift the transfer case lever inone continuous motion intoeither the Four-Wheel Drive Highor Two-Wheel Drive Highposition.

. Shifting from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive Highwhile the vehicle is in motionmay require that moderate forcebe applied to the shift lever for afew seconds before Four-WheelDrive High can be engaged,especially in cold weather.

. In extremely cold weather, it maybe necessary to slow or stop thevehicle to shift into Four-WheelDrive High.

. While in Four-Wheel Drive High,the vehicle can be driven at anyposted legal speed limit.

Shifting In or Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

Notice: Shifting the transfer caseinto Four-Wheel-Drive Low whilemoving at speeds faster than5 km/h (3mph) may causepremature wear to the transfer

case, and may cause the gears togrind. To avoid causingpremature wear, and grinding thegears, do not shift the transfercase into Four-Wheel-Drive Lowwhile the vehicle is moving fasterthan 5 km/h (3 mph).. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive

Low should be done, if possible,with the vehicle at a slight roll,5 km/h (3 mph) or less.

. Shift the transmission intoN (Neutral).

{ Warning


. Shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow with the vehicle at a stopmay be more difficult. You maybe unable to complete the shiftto Four-Wheel Drive Low, andthe transfer case will end up inN (Neutral). This is normal, andis a function of the gear teethaligning in the transfer case.When this happens, make surethe engine is on, shift thetransmission momentarily toD (Drive) and back toN (Neutral), and then completethe transfer case shift.

. Shift the transfer case shift leverin one continuous motion intothe Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition.

. When in Four-Wheel Drive Lowdo not drive faster than72 km/h (45 mph). This willreduce wear and extend the lifeof your transfer case.



Shifting In or Out of Neutral

1. With the vehicle running and theengine at an idle, set the parkingbrake.

2. Place the transmission intoN (Neutral).

Shift the transfer case in onecontinuous motion into or out of theN (Neutral) position.

Electronic Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.



Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10-89 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-89.

You can choose among four drivingsettings:

Indicator lights in the dial showwhich setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights do notcome on, you should take thevehicle to your dealer for service.An indicator light flashes whileshifting the transfer case andremains illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If for some reason the

transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, such

as on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow while driving off-road in deepsand, deep mud, deep snow, andwhile climbing or descending steephills.





{ Warning


N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-89 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10-89 for more information.

If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you should takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice. See “SERVICE 4WHEELDRIVE” under TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.See “Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low” for more information.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for the

Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissionin gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the requestedmode indicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds andnot complete the shift. After



30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High,or Two-Wheel Drive High, thevehicle must be stopped or movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to theFour-Wheel Drive High orTwo-Wheel Drive High position. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Two-Wheel Drive Highindicator light to stop flashing andremain on before shifting thetransmission into gear.


It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving more than5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO, or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but will not completethe shift. With the vehicle moving

less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting into Neutral

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the regular brakepedal. See Parking Brake onpage 9-54 for more information.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theNeutral light starts blinking. Thiswill take at least 10 seconds.Then slowly release the dial tothe four low position. The



N (Neutral) light will come onwhen the transfer case shift toN (Neutral) is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. Release the parking brake priorto moving the vehicle.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift the transfer case out ofN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.



5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.

Excessively shifting the transfercase into or out of the differentmodes may cause the transfer caseto enter the shift protection mode.

This will protect the transfer casefrom possible damage and will onlyallow the transfer case to respond toone shift per 10 seconds. Thetransfer case may stay in this modefor up to three minutes.

Automatic Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out ofFour-Wheel Drive.



You can choose among five drivingsettings:

Indicator lights in the dial showwhich setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights do notcome on, you should take thevehicle to your dealer for service.An indicator light will flash whileshifting the transfer case. It willremain illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If for some reason thetransfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable. Whendriving the vehicle in AUTO, the

front axle is engaged, but thevehicle's power is sent only to thefront and rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Drivingin this mode results in slightly lowerfuel economy than Two-WheelDrive High.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow if you are driving off-road indeep sand, deep mud, deep snow,and while climbing or descendingsteep hills.



{ Warning


N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-89 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10-89 for more information.



If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you should takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice. See “SERVICE 4WHEELDRIVE” under TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel DriveHigh or AUTO (AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive)

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High or AUTO position. Thiscan be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-WheelDrive Low. The indicator light willflash while shifting. It will remain onwhen the shift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.The indicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the requestedmode indicator light has stoppedflashing could damage the

transfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds andnot complete the shift. After30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.



Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO orTwo-Wheel Drive High, the vehiclemust be stopped or moving lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive High,AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive Highposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO orTwo-Wheel Drive High indicator lightto stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the requestedmode indicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always wait

for the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving more than5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but will not completethe shift. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting into Neutral

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal. SeeParking Brake on page 9-54 formore information.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition in ON/RUN.

4. Put the transmission inN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the four low position.The N (Neutral) light will comeon when the transfer case shiftto N (Neutral) is complete.



7. If the engine is running, makesure that the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).



Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift out of N (Neutral) do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High,Four-Wheel Drive High,or AUTO.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.



5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle might have the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-24.



Along with ABS, the vehicle has aDynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP)system. If there is a DRP problem,both the brake and ABS warninglights come on accompanied by a10‐second chime. The lights andchime will come on each time theignition is turned on until theproblem is repaired. See your dealerfor service.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each front wheel and atboth rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letantilock work. You might feel thebrakes vibrate or hear some noise,but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

If the vehicle has ABS, it allows thedriver to steer and brake at thesame time. However, if the vehicledoes not have ABS, the firstreaction, to hit the brake pedal hard

and hold it down, might be thewrong thing to do. The wheels canstop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to thedriver's steering. Momentum willcarry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stoppedrolling. That could be off the road,into the very thing the driver wastrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If the vehicle does not have ABS,use a squeeze braking technique.This gives maximum braking whilemaintaining steering control. Do thisby pushing on the brake pedal withsteadily increasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probablywant to squeeze the brakes hardwithout locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This helpsretain steering control. With ABS, itis different.

In many emergencies, steering canhelp more than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

For vehicles with a release handle,set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-23.

A chime sounds and the warninglight flashes when the parking brakeis applied and the vehicle is movingat least 8 km/h (5 mph).

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Thenpull the bottom edge of the leverwith the parking brake symbol,located above the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light goes off.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on any hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-73.

For vehicles without a releasehandle, set the parking brake byholding the regular brake pedaldown, then pushing down theparking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-23.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parking



brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-73.

Brake AssistIf this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, italso has a Brake Assist featuredesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brake

control module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature, whichmay be useful when the vehicle isstopped on a grade. This feature isdesigned to prevent the vehicle fromrolling, either forward or rearward,

during vehicle drive off. After thedriver completely stops and holdsthe vehicle in a complete standstillon a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, HSA may also applythe trailer brakes. It will not activateif the vehicle is in a drive gear andfacing downhill or if the vehicle isfacing uphill and in R (Reverse).There may be situations on minorhills (less than 5% grade) with aloaded vehicle or while pulling atrailer where HSA will not activate.



Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9-95.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9-59.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith a message will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).If a DIC message appears, makesure the StabiliTrak system has notbeen turned off using the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakbutton. Then turn the vehicle off,wait 15 seconds, and then turn itback on again to reset the system.If any of the messages still appearon the DIC, the vehicle should be

taken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Ride Control System Messageson page 5-42.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem or the TSC feature is bothon and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the instrument panel.



The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button if both systems(traction control and StabiliTrak)were previously on.

To disable both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button until theStabiliTrak OFF light illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. This will also disable theTSC feature.

Traction control and StabiliTrak canbe turned on by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonif they are not automatically shut offfor any other reason. This will alsoenable the TSC feature.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak systemis turned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate message will bedisplayed on the DIC to warn thedriver. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for moreinformation.

When the TCS has been turned off,system noises may still be heard asa result of the brake-traction controlcoming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9-13.

When the transfer case is in 4LO,the stability system is automaticallydisabled, the StabiliTrak light comeson, and the appropriate messagewill appear on the DIC. Both tractioncontrol and StabiliTrak areautomatically disabled in thiscondition.

Traction Control Operation

The TCS is part of the StabiliTraksystem. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power tothe wheels (engine speedmanagement) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel(brake-traction control) asnecessary.

The TCS is enabled automaticallywhen the vehicle is started. It willactivate and the StabiliTrak light willflash if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion oftraction control will work. Theengine speed management will be



disabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while theselights and messages aredisplayed.

The TCS may activate on dry orrough roads or under conditionssuch as heavy acceleration whileturning or abrupt upshifts/downshiftsof the transmission. When thishappens, a reduction in accelerationmay be noticed, or a noise orvibration may be heard. This isnormal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9-59.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.

Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) onpage 9-95.

Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. See HillStart Assist (HSA) on page 9-55.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10-3.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.



Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

For vehicles with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

For vehicles with an Allison orHydra-Matic 6-speed automatictransmission, see “Grade Braking”under Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37for an explanation of how cruisecontrol interacts with the RangeSelection Mode, tow/haul and gradebraking systems.

For vehicles with the StabiliTraksystem that begins to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9-56.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol or make the vehicledecelerate.



[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon after the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed.

1. PressI.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.

While going downhill:. Vehicles with a four speed

automatic transmission mayneed to have the brakes appliedor the transmission shifted to alower gear to maintain driverselected speed.

. Vehicles with a six speedautomatic transmission and agasoline engine have CruiseGrade Braking to help maintaindriver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andCruise Control is active. It is notenabled in Range SelectionMode. It assists in maintainingdriver selected speed whendriving on downhill grades byusing the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.

To disable and enable CruiseGrade Braking for the currentignition key cycle, press andhold the Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-44.

. Vehicles with a diesel enginehave Cruise Grade Brakingenabled when Tow/Haul Mode ison, the exhaust brake is on,or both are on.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-32 andTow/Haul Mode onpage 9-37.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingI or if the ignition is turned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) systemassists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least25 cm (10 in) off the ground.

{ Warning

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

damage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below tailgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from

the rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the rear park aiddisable button located next to theradio.

The indicator light comes on whenthe system is disabled and turns offwhen the system is on.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.



Notice: If you use URPA while thetailgate is lowered, it may notdetect an object behind yourvehicle, and you might back intothe object and damage yourvehicle. Always verify the tailgateis closed when using URPA orturn off URPA when driving withthe tailgate lowered.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-93.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the tailgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed and thetailgate is raised, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC) system displays part of thescene behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.



Vehicles without NavigationSystem

The RVC system displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe vehicle is on and shifted intoR (Reverse) the video imageappears on the inside rearviewmirror. The video image disappearsafter the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

Turning the RVC System On or Off

To turn off the RVC system, pressand holdz , located on the insiderearview mirror, until the leftindicator light turns off. The RVCdisplay is now disabled.

To turn the RVC system on, pressand holdz until the left indicatorlight comes on. The RVC systemdisplay will appear in the mirror.

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

The RVC system is designed tohelp the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behind

the vehicle. When the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), the videoimage appears on the navigationscreen. After a delay, the navigationscreen displays the last screen afterthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

Turning the RVC System On or Off

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press MENU to enter theconfigure menu options. Turnthe Multifunction knob until theDisplay feature is highlightedand press the Multifunctionknob. Or press the Displayscreen button

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVCsystem is on.

The delay after shifting out ofR (Reverse) is approximately10 seconds. The delay can becanceled by performing one of thefollowing:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting into P (Park).. Reaching a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that allows for viewingparking assist symbols on thenavigation screen while using theRVC. The Ultrasonic Rear ParkAssist (URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, theRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9-62.



The symbols appear near objectsdetected by the URPA system. Thesymbol may cover the object whenviewing the navigation screen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.




5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

If the vehicle has dual rear wheels,this feature will not be available.

To turn the guidelines on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.




5. Touch the Guidelines screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

RVC Location

The camera is near the tailgatehandle.

This shows the field of view that thecamera provides.



A. View displayed by the camera

A. View displayed by the camera

B. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objectswhich are close to either corner ofthe bumper or under the bumper donot display.

Disconnecting the RVC

The rear vision camera must bedisconnected if the tailgate needs tobe removed.

To disconnect the camera:

1. Remove the license plate.

2. Disconnect the cameraconnectors from the chassisharness, located behind thelicense plate, by pressing on therelease tab on each connector.

A. Chassis harness connector

B. Release tab

C. Camera connector

3. Plug the two exposed chassisharness connectors together toprevent contamination.



A. Chassis harness connector

B. Release tab

4. Feed the wiring harness throughthe pickup box, then plug thecamera connectors together toprevent contamination.

5. Remove the tailgate. SeeTailgate on page 2-9 for moreinformation.

6. Reinstall the license plate.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe RVC and make sure thegrommet and connection aresecure.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the RVC System On orOff” earlier in this section.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

The RVC system display in therearview mirror may turn off or notappear as expected due to one ofthe following conditions. If thisoccurs the left indicator light on themirror will flash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.



During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will flash while the vehicleis in R (Reverse) or until theconditions return to normal.

Press and holdz when the leftindicator light is flashing to turn offthe video display along with the leftindicator light.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

For gasoline engine vehicles, use ofthe recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines.

See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or flex fuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel onpage 9-70.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heard



when using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

Notice: Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuel

system and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolines

containing MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-68.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-21. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-68.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, partnumber 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUS

is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Recommended Fuel onpage 9-68.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

After refueling, the vehiclecalculates the composition of thefuel. It is not recommended torepeatedly switch between fuels.If fuels are switched frequently, addas much fuel as possible and do notadd less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. Drive at least 11 km (7 mi)immediately after refueling to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank on page 9-71.



Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the TankIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. Vehiclesthat have a FlexFuel badge and ayellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See E85 or FlexFuel on page 9-70.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

If the vehicle is a dual fuel tankchassis cab model, and it runs outof fuel, refuel the front fuel tank firstto ensure a quick restart.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-93.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-21.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-41 for moreinformation.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-21.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-89.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-89.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate Control System”in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-31.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start the

combination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand to

the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.



Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-37.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)

for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10-20.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Things that are



especially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see thebi-fuel supplement for moreinformation.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9-22 for more information.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell or even at all. The driver andpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in this

section and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” later in thissection.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.



Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.

For kingpin weight and trailertongue weight information, see“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.

Weights listed apply forconventional trailers and fifth-wheeltrailers unless otherwise noted.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 — Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 — Payload PerformancePkg (UB7)

3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)






2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD

6.0LV8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer

4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 6 396 kg (14,100 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)




6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer

4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box

6.0LV8 3.73 4 309kg (9,500 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)


6.0LV8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)


4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)


4.10 6 305 kg (13,900 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)



3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box



4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)





4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)



3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box

6.0LV8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box



4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)


4.10 6 169 kg (13,600 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)



(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.



Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. See “ Vehicle Load Limits”for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

Trailer tongue weight (A) should be10 to 15 percent and fifth-wheel orgooseneck kingpin weight should be15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailerweight up to the maximums forvehicle series and hitch type.



Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

2500/3500Standard Box

Weight Carrying orWeight Distributing

680 kg (1,500 lb)

2500/3500 Long Box

Weight Carrying orWeight Distributing

907 kg (2,000 lb)

2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb)

3500 Single RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)

3500 Dual RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceedthe GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section for more information.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification Tire labelon the drivers door or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15 for moreinformation. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make surenot to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.



Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weight ratings— GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TrailerWeight Rating, or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the tow vehicle and trailercombination, fully loaded for the trip,getting individual weights for each ofthese items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with aweight-carrying hitch which simplyfeatures a coupler latched to thehitch ball, or a tow eye latched to apintle hook. Other trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distributethe trailer tongue weight among thetwo vehicle and trailer axles.

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitchesmay also be used. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” under TrailerTowing on page 9-76 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment

A weight distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 7000 lbs Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1500 7001 to 9900 lbs Required 50%

1500 Over 9900 lbs Required 100%

2500/3500 Up to 18000 lbs Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure distance (A) beforecoupling the trailer to the hitch ball.If the hitch requires 50%distribution, measure the heightagain after the trailer is coupled andadjust the spring bars so thedistance (A) is as close as possibleto halfway between the twomeasurements. When 100%distribution is required the springbars should be adjusted so thedistance (A) is the same as the

initial measurement after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle andadjusting the hitch.

Fifth-Wheel and GooseneckTrailering

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailerscan be used with many pickupmodels. These trailers place alarger percentage of the weight(kingpin weight) on the tow vehiclethan conventional trailers. Makesure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.



Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpinweight should be 15 to 25 percent ofthe trailer weight up to the maximumamount specified in the traileringchart for the vehicle. See “Weight ofthe Trailer” under Trailer Towing onpage 9-76 for more information.

The hitch should be located in thepickup bed so that its centerline isover or slightly in front of the rearaxle. Take care that it is not so farforward that it will contact the backof the cab in sharp turns. This isespecially important for short boxpickups. Trailer pin box extensionsand sliding fifth-wheel hitchassemblies can help this condition.There should be at least six inchesof clearance between the top of thepickup box and the bottom of thetrailer shelf that extends overthe box.

Make sure the hitch is attached tothe tow vehicle frame rails. Do notuse the pickup box for support.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper; otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and follow

the instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic brake system.

Auxiliary Battery

The auxiliary battery provision canbe used to supply electrical powerto additional equipment that may beadded, such as a slide-in camper.If the vehicle has this provision, thisrelay will be located on the driverside of the vehicle, next to theunderhood electrical center.

Be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withany electrical equipment that isinstalled.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not use equipment that



exceeds the maximum amperagerating of 40 amperes for theauxiliary battery provision.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle is equipped with one ofthe following wiring harnesses fortowing a trailer or hauling a slide-incamper.

Basic Trailer Wiring

All regular, extended cab and crewcab pickups have a seven-wiretrailer towing harness.

For vehicles not equipped withheavy duty trailering, the harness issecured to the vehicle's framebehind the spare tire mount. Theharness requires the installation of atrailer connector, which is availablethrough your dealer.

If towing a light-duty trailer with astandard four-way round pinconnector, an adapter is availablefrom your dealer.

Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring HarnessPackage

For vehicles equipped with heavyduty trailering, the harnessconnector is mounted in the bumper.The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red: Battery Feed*

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits areinstalled in the underhood electricalcenter, but the wires are notconnected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center. The fuseand wire for the ITBC is factoryinstalled and connected if thevehicle is equipped with an ITBC.The fuse for the battery feed is notrequired if the vehicle has anauxiliary battery. If the vehicle doesnot have an auxiliary battery, haveyour dealer or authorized servicecenter install the required fuse.

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton, if equipped, located at theend of the shift lever. This will boostthe vehicle system voltage andproperly charge the battery. If thetrailer is too light for Tow/HaulMode, or the vehicle is not equippedwith Tow/Haul, turn on the



headlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer WiringPackage

The seven-wire camper harness islocated under the front edge of thepickup box on the driver side of thevehicle, attached to the framebracket. A connector must be addedto the wiring harness whichconnects to the camper.

The harness contains the followingcamper/trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If the vehicle is equipped with the“Heavy-Duty Trailering” option,please refer to “Heavy-Duty TrailerWiring Package” earlier in thissection.

When the camper-wiring harness isordered without the heavy-dutytrailering package, a seven-wireharness with a seven-pin connectoris located at the rear of the vehicleand is tied to the vehicle's frame.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires behind thesteering column for the trailer brakecontroller. The harness contains thefollowing wires:. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to

Trailer Connector. Red/Black: Battery. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch. White: Ground

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

If the vehicle is equipped with anIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) System, the blunt cuts exist,but are not connected further in theharness. If an aftermarket trailerbrake controller is installed, the



ITBC must be disconnected. Do notpower both ITBC and aftermarketcontrollers to control the trailerbrakes at the same time.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when theTow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9-37 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing on page 9-76. Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.



Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor electric trailer brakes.

This symbol is located on the TrailerBrake Control Panel on vehicleswith an Integrated Trailer BrakeControl system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem. This available power outputto the trailer brakes can be adjustedto a wide range of traileringsituations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak (if equipped)systems. In trailering conditions that

cause the vehicle’s antilock brake orStabiliTrak systems to activate,power sent to the trailer's brakes willbe automatically adjusted tominimize trailer wheel lock-up. Thisdoes not imply that the trailer hasStabiliTrak.

The vehicle may have a TrailerSway Control (TSC) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) onpage 9-95.

The vehicle may have a Hill StartAssist (HSA) feature. See Hill StartAssist (HSA) on page 9-55.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sureall of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. The

ITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON orin RUN.

The ITBC system can only be usedwith trailers with electric brakes.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has asurge, air,or electric-over-hydraulic trailerbrake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be anincrease in stopping distance ortrailer instability which couldresult in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. Use the ITBCsystem only with electric brakes.



Trailer Brake Control Panel

A. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn. See Instrument Panel(Base/Uplevel Version) on page 1-2or Instrument Panel (PremiumVersion) on page 1-5 for moreinformation. The control panelallows adjustment to the amount ofoutput, referred to as trailer gain,

available to the electric trailerbrakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. TheTrailer Brake Control Panel is usedalong with the Trailer Brake DisplayPage on the DIC to adjust anddisplay power output to the trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages on the vehicle’s DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5-28 for more information.

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to theelectric trailer brakes, trailerconnection, and system operationalstatus.

The Trailer Brake Display Page canbe displayed by performing any ofthe following actions:. Scrolling through the DIC menu

pages using the odometer tripstem or the DIC VehicleInformation button (if equipped).

. Pressing a Trailer Gain button—If the Trailer Brake Display Pageis not currently displayed,pressing a Trailer Gain buttonwill first recall the current TrailerGain setting. After the TrailerBrake Display Page is displayed,each press and release of thegain buttons will then cause theTrailer Gain setting to change.

. Activating the Manual TrailerBrake Apply lever.

. Connecting a trailer equippedwith electric trailer brakes.

All DIC warning and servicemessages must first beacknowledged by the driver bypressing the odometer trip stem orthe DIC Vehicle Information button(if equipped) before the TrailerBrake Display Page can bedisplayed and Trailer Gain can beadjusted.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting isdisplayed any time the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page is active. This settingcan be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0



with either a trailer connected ordisconnected. To adjust the TrailerGain, press one of the Trailer Gainadjustment buttons located on theTrailer Brake Control Panel. Pressand hold a gain button to cause theTrailer Gain to continuously adjust.To turn the output to the trailer off,adjust the Trailer Gain setting to0.0 (zero).

0.0 (zero) gain is the factory defaultsetting. To properly adjust trailergain, see “Trailer Gain AdjustmentProcedure” later in this section.

TRAILER OUTPUT: This isdisplayed any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputto the electric brakes is based onthe amount of vehicle brakingpresent and relative to the TrailerGain setting. Output is displayedfrom 0 to 10 bars for each gainsetting.

Vehicles with Trailer Sway Control(TSC) or Hill Start Assist (HSA),output to the electric trailer brakesmay be displayed when the systems

are active. See Trailer Sway Control(TSC) on page 9-95 and Hill StartAssist (HSA) on page 9-55.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:. No trailer is connected. A trailer without electric brakes

is connected (no DIC messageis displayed)

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also be displayedon the DIC)

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the electric trailerbrakes (a CHECK TRAILERWIRING message will also bedisplayed on the DIC)

. There is a fault in the ITBCsystem (a SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message willalso be displayed in the DIC)

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is located on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel and is used to applythe trailer’s electric brakesindependent of the vehicle’s brakes.This lever is used in the Trailer GainAdjustment Procedure to properlyadjust the power output to the trailerbrakes. Sliding the lever to the leftwill apply only the trailer brakes.The power output to the trailer isindicated in the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page on the DIC. If thevehicle’s service brakes are appliedwhile using the Manual Trailer BrakeApply Lever, the trailer output powerwill be the greater of the two.

The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle braking or manual trailerbrakes are applied.



Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

Setting the Trailer Gain properly isneeded for the best trailer stoppingperformance. A trailer that isover-gained may result in lockedtrailer brakes. A trailer that isunder-gained may result in notenough trailer braking. Both of theseconditions may result in poorerstopping and stability of the vehicleand trailer.

Use the following procedure tocorrectly adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Make sure the trailer brakes arein proper working condition.

2. Connect a properly loaded trailerto the vehicle and make allnecessary mechanical and

electrical connections. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15 for more information.

3. After the electrical connection ismade to a trailer equipped withelectric brakes:. A TRAILER CONNECTED

message will be brieflydisplayed on the DIC.

. The Trailer Brake DisplayPage will appear on theDIC showing TRAILERGAIN and TRAILEROUTPUT.

. In the Trailer Output displayon the DIC, “- - - - - -” willdisappear if there is noerror present. Connecting atrailer without electricbrakes will not clear the sixdashed lines.

4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by usingthe gain adjustment (+ / -)buttons on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel.

5. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level road surfacerepresentative of the towingcondition and free of traffic atabout 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) and fully apply theManual Trailer Brake ApplyLever.

Adjusting trailer gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to justbelow the point of trailer wheellock-up, indicated by trailerwheel squeal or tire smoke whena trailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.



7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading orroad surface conditions changeor if trailer wheel lock-up isnoticed at any time while towing.

Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and TRAILER OUTPUTthrough the DIC, trailer connectionand ITBC system status aredisplayed on the DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will be briefly displayedwhen a trailer with electric brakes isfirst connected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. The driver canalso acknowledge this messagebefore it automatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will be displayed if:

1. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if thedriver acknowledges thismessage or if the trailer harnessis re-connected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if thedriver acknowledges thismessage or if the trailer harnessis re-connected.

2. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the electric trailerbrakes. This message willcontinue as long as there is anelectrical fault in the trailerwiring. This message will alsoturn off if the driveracknowledges this message.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection, do the following:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage re-appears, theelectrical fault is on thevehicle side.



If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only re-appears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will bedisplayed when there is a problemwith the ITBC system. If thismessage persists over multipleignition cycles, there is a problemwith the ITBC system. Take thevehicle to an authorized GM dealerto have the ITBC system diagnosedand repaired.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message isdisplayed while driving the vehicle,power is no longer available to thetrailer brakes. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer and

turn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

An authorized GM dealer may beable to diagnose and repairproblems with the trailer. However,any diagnosis and repair of thetrailer is not covered under thevehicle warranty. Please contactyour trailer dealer for assistancewith trailer repairs and trailerwarranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTSC feature. Trailer sway isunintended side-to-side motion of atrailer while being towed. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and theTSC detects that sway is increasing,the vehicle brakes are selectivelyapplied at each wheel, to helpreduce excessive trailer sway. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, and the trailer has

the electric actuated brake system,StabiliTrak may also apply the trailerbrakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduceengine torque to help slow thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9-56.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to asafe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment on page 9-84 fortrailer ratings and hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-36 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-37.

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar EquipmentBefore installing a snow plow on thevehicle, here are some things youneed to know:

Notice: If the vehicle does nothave the snow plow preppackage, adding a plow candamage the vehicle, and therepairs would not be covered bywarranty. Unless the vehicle wasbuilt to carry a snow plow, do notadd one to the vehicle. If thevehicle has the snow plow preppackage, called RPO VYU, thenthe payload the vehicle can carrywill be reduced when a snowplow is installed. The vehicle canbe damaged if either the front orrear axle ratings or the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)are exceeded.

Some vehicles are built with aspecial snow plow prep package,called RPO VYU. If the vehicle hasthis option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such as



the weights on the vehicle's axlesand the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), are not exceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:. The options the vehicle came

with, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers intended to becarried.

. The weight of items added to thevehicle, like a tool box ortruck cap.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo intended to becarried.

Say, for example, you have a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow. The total weightof all occupants and cargo insidethe cab should not exceed 135 kg(300 lb). This means that you mayonly be able to carry one passenger.But, even this may be too much ifthere is other equipment alreadyadding to the weight of the vehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safelycarrying a snow plow on the vehicle:. Make sure the weight on the

front and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Follow the snow plowmanufacturer'srecommendations regarding rearballast. Rear ballast may berequired to ensure a proper frontand rear weight distribution ratio,even though the actual weight atthe front axle may be less thanthe front axle rating.

. The snow plow manufacturer orinstaller can assist you indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snowplow/vehiclecombination does not exceed

the GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) and the frontaxle weight of the vehicle with fullfuel and passengers. Basically, it isthe amount of weight that can beadded to the front axle beforereaching the front GAWR.

The front axle reserve capacity forthe vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.



United States

Canada

In order to calculate the amount ofweight any front accessory, such asa snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight theaccessory is adding to thefront axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lb) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheel base is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.))/W.B. =(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg(980 lbs)

So, if the front axle reserve capacityis more than 445 kg (980 lbs), thesnow plow could be added withoutexceeding the front GAWR.

Heavier equipment can be added onthe front of the vehicle if it iscompensated for by carrying fewerpassengers, less cargo, or bypositioning cargo toward the rear.This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the frontGAWR, rear GAWR, and the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) mustnever be exceeded.



{ Warning

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to haveproper braking performance. If thebrakes cannot work properly, youcould have a crash. To help thebrakes work properly when asnow plow is installed, alwaysfollow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weightmay be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicleweight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.

Total vehicle reserve capacity is thedifference between the GVWR andthe weight of the truck with full fueland passengers. It is the amount ofweight that can be added to thevehicle before reaching the GVWR.Keep in mind that reserve capacitynumbers are intended as a guidewhen selecting the amount ofequipment or cargo the truck cancarry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,rear, or total weight, go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle. Yourdealer can also help with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Emergency Roof LampProvisions

Vehicles with the RPO VYU snowplow prep package also have anemergency roof lamp provisionpackage, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is providedabove the overhead console. SeeAuxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp onpage 6-6 for switch location.



Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. Owners should be awarethat, as manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removedwhich could affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapta pickup to permit its safe use witha specialized body should beinstalled by the body builder.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-31Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-32Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-34

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Pick-Up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Taillamps (Chassis CabModels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-50Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-65When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-89Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-37.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3-38.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-16.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicle tothe lower left of the steeringwheel.

2. Then go to the front of thevehicle and locate the secondaryhood release, near the center ofthe grille.

3. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

4. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then bring the hood from fullopen to within 152 mm (6 in)from the closed position, pause,then push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V8 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine Similar)


10-6 Vehicle Care

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15.

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-16.

C. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 10-84.

D. Battery on page 10-27.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10-84.

F. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-Speed Transmission)on page 10-10 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10-12.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-6.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10-6.

I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10-23.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid onpage 10-25.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-40.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-23.

If the vehicle has a diesel engineand/or an Allison Transmission, seethe Duramax Diesel Supplement.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmful

to the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos™1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when the systemhas calculated that oil life has beendiminished, a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on toindicate that an oil change isnecessary. See Engine OilMessages on page 5-40. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. The

engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. For vehicles without theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, an oil change is neededwhen the OIL LIFEREMAINING percentage is near0%. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this workand reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the system on most vehicles:

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, the vehicle must be inP (Park) to access this display.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5-28.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.


10-10 Vehicle Care

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:


2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-28.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and itcomes back on when the vehicle isstarted and/or the OIL LIFEREMAINING is near 0%, the engineoil life system has not been reset.Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3 and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be best to havethis done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).


Vehicle Care 10-11

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 miles) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sitting foreight hours or more with the engineoff, but this is used only as areference. Let the engine run at idlefor five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, the fluid mustbe checked when hot before addingfluid. Checking the fluid hot will giveyou a more accurate reading of thefluid level.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, follow these steps:

1. Locate the transmission dipstickhandle with this graphic which islocated at the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for moreinformation on location.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

5. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is hot. A cold check is usedonly as a reference. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-12.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500 –800 rpm) for at least 1 minute.Slowly release the brake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andpress the Trip/Fuel button or tripodometer reset stem untilTRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMPreading, determine and performthe appropriate checkprocedure. If the TRANS TEMPreading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperature isreached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C (80°Fand 90°F).

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.


10-14 Vehicle Care

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for moreinformation.


3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLD

band. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter(1 Pint). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases, so it

is important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for moreinformation.


3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.


Vehicle Care 10-15

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid level islow, add only enough fluid tobring the level into the HOTband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Pickup Models” under “EngineAir Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax®

Diesel Supplement for the correctinspection and replacementprocedures.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-3 for more information.If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 6. When the engineair cleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

2. Loosen the four screws on thecover of the housing and lift upthe cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tightenthe screws.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for moreinformation.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


Vehicle Care 10-17

5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 LV6 Engine, 4.8 L V8 Engine, 6.0 LV8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine

Similar)

A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-20.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)


10-18 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature

. Protects against rust andcorrosion

. Will not damage aluminum parts

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of enginecoolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for more information onlocation.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.


Vehicle Care 10-19

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in thecooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank forGasoline Engines

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Cooling System” in theDuramax Diesel Supplement for theproper coolant fill procedure.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.


10-20 Vehicle Care

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90°C (195°F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper

mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1 through 6.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the DuramaxDiesel Supplement for moreinformation.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on the vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-15.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on theinstrument panel. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5-39 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5-40.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damage


Vehicle Care 10-21

would not be covered by thewarranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10-22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10-22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day

. Stops after high-speed driving

. Idles for long periods in traffic

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towingon page 9-76.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If stopped in a traffic jam, applythe brake, shift to N (Neutral);otherwise, shift to the highestgear while driving—D (Drive) or3 (Third).

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safe


10-22 Vehicle Care

vehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message displays, anoverheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps to prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows the

vehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Drivingextended km (mi) and/or towing atrailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. Theengine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-6.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan, when the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or high

outside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch disengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen starting the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. The


Vehicle Care 10-23

fans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID message


10-24 Vehicle Care

displays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand could have rear drum brakes orrear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.


Vehicle Care 10-25

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-23.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance freebattery (or batteries). Refer to thereplacement number on the originalbattery label when a new battery is

needed. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5 for batterylocation.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-84 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine when tocheck the lubricant.


10-28 Vehicle Care

How to Check Lubricant

Electric Shift Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

Manual Shift Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

Active Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (A) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (A) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.


Vehicle Care 10-29

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

All Except 1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold, add

enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (A) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (A) hole.


10-30 Vehicle Care

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.

Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


2500HD with 6.0 L

All Other Series and Engines


Vehicle Care 10-31

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For all 4.3 L, 4.8 L and 5.3 L

1500 Series applications, theproper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in)below the bottom of the fill hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

. For all 6.0 L and 6.2 L 1500Series applications, the properlevel is from 15mm to 40 mm(0.6 in to 1.6 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

. For all 6.0 L 2500HD Seriesapplications, the proper level isfrom 0mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in)below the bottom of the fill plughole, located on the rear axle.Add only enough fluid to reachthe proper level.

. For all 6.6 L Duramax Diesel2500HD Series applications andall 3500 Series applications, theproper level is from 17mm to21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The noise controlsystem warranty is given in yourwarranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person, otherthan for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-54.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) with

normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when youpress the key release button.

On all vehicles, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


10-34 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To remove the wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas oneach side of the blade, and turnthe blade assembly away fromthe arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe grooved areas are fully set inthe locked position.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11-15.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-38.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

A. Park/Turn Signal/Sidemarker Lamp

B. Low‐Beam Headlamp

C. High‐Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4


10-36 Vehicle Care

2. If you are replacing the bulb onthe passenger side, remove theEngine Air Cleaner cover. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15 for more information.

3. Reach in and access the bulbsockets from inside the enginecompartment.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

5. Unplug the electrical connectorfrom the old bulb by releasingthe clips on the bulb socket.

6. Replace it with a new bulb.

7. Plug in the electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the new bulb socketinto the headlamp assembly andturn it clockwise to secure.

Pick-Up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLampsThe pick-up box identification lampsare LEDs. For replacement of theLED lighting assembly contact yourdealer.

To replace a pickup box fendermarker lamp bulb:

1. Press the tab from the back toremove the lamp.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove fromthe lamp assembly.

3. Gently pry the bulb from thesocket.

4. Install the new bulb in socket.

5. Reinstall socket into lampassembly.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.

Taillamps (Chassis CabModels)

A. Backup Lamp

B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the four screws.

2. Lift the lens off the lampassembly.

3. Turn the old bulbcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out from the socket.


Vehicle Care 10-37

4. Install a new bulb into thesocket, turn it clockwise, andpress it in until it is tight.

5. Reinstall the lens and the fourscrews.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp

B. Back-up Lamp


1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2-9 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws near thetailgate latch strikerpost and pullrearward until disengaging thetwo outer pins on the taillampassembly from the vehicle.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the socket.

5. Press a new bulb into the socketand turn the socket clockwiseinto the taillamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp

A. Cargo Lamp

B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) Bulb


10-38 Vehicle Care


1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly.

2. On the reverse side of the lampassembly, remove the bulbsocket by turning it one quarterturn counterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the socket.

4. Install the bulb by pushing thebulb straight into the socket.

5. Install the bulb socket into thelamp assembly by turning itone quarter turn clockwise.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly andtighten the screws.

License Plate Lamp

A. License Plate Lamp Housing

B. Bulb

C. Bulb Socket


1. Using a small flat-bladed tool,insert the blade end at the backedge of the rear license platelamp housing (A).

2. Gently push forward while liftingthe back edge of the lamphousing from the bumperopening.

3. Turn the bulb socket (C) one‐quarter turn to release the bulbsocket from the lamphousing (A).

4. Pull the bulb (B) from the bulbsocket (C).

5. Reverse the steps to install.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 3047K

Back-up Lamp* 1156

Cargo Lamp andCenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

912LL

Fender MarkerLamp (If Equipped)

W5WLL

Front Turn SignalLamp andParking Lamp

3157A


Vehicle Care 10-39

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

High-BeamHeadlamp

9005

Low-BeamHeadlamp

H11

LicensePlate Lamp

168

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

3047K

Stoplamp/TurnSignal Lamp/Taillamp*

1157

* Chassis Cab Models

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and don't have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without– like the radio oraccessory power outlet– and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax Diesel supplementfor more information.

The Engine Compartment FuseBlock is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuses Usage

1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

Fuses Usage

2 ElectronicSuspensionControl, AutomaticLevel ControlExhaust

3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

Fuses Usage

4 Engine Controls

5 Engine ControlModule, ThrottleControl

6 Trailer BrakeController

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensor

9 Antilock BrakesSystem 2

10 Trailer Back-upLamps

11 Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

12 Engine ControlModule (Battery)

13 Fuel Injectors,Ignition Coils(Right Side)


10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

14 TransmissionControl Module(Battery)

15 Vehicle Back-upLamps

16 Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

17 Air ConditioningCompressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19 TransmissionControls (Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

21 Fuel SystemControl Module

22 Not Used

23 Not Used

24 Fuel Injectors,Ignition Coils(Left Side)

Fuses Usage

25 Trailer Park Lamps

26 Driver Side ParkLamps

27 Passenger SidePark Lamps

28 Fog Lamps

29 Horn

30 Passenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

31 Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)

32 Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

33 Daytime RunningLamps 2

34 Sunroof

35 Key IgnitionSystem, TheftDeterrent System

Fuses Usage

36 Windshield Wiper

37 SEO B2 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

38 Electric AdjustablePedals

39 Climate Controls(Battery)

40 Airbag System(Ignition)

41 Amplifier

42 Audio System

43 Miscellaneous(Ignition), CruiseControl

44 Not Used

45 Airbag System(Battery)

46 Instrument PanelCluster

47 Power Take-Off


Vehicle Care 10-43

Fuses Usage

48 Auxiliary ClimateControl (Ignition)

49 CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

50 Rear Defogger

51 Heated Mirrors

52 SEO B1 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

53 Accessory PowerOutlet

54 SEO UpfitterUsage

55 Climate Controls(Ignition)

56 Engine ControlModule, SecondaryFuel Pump(Ignition)

J-CaseFuses

Usage

57 Cooling Fan 1

58 Not Used

59 Heavy DutyAntilock BrakeSystem

60 Cooling Fan 2

61 Antilock BrakeSystem 1

62 Starter

63 Stud 2 (TrailerBrakes)

64 Left BussedElectrical Center 1

65 Not Used

66 Not Used

67 Transfer Case

J-CaseFuses

Usage

68 Stud 1 (TrailerConnector BatteryPower) (Optional -40A FuseRequired)

69 Mid-BussedElectrical Center 1

70 Climate ControlBlower

71 Not Used

72 Left BussedElectrical Center 2


10-44 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

FAN HI Cooling Fan HighSpeed

FAN LO Cooling Fan LowSpeed

FAN CNTRL Cooling FanControl

HDLPLO/HID

Low-BeamHeadlamp

FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

Relays Usage

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUEL PMP Fuel Pump

PRK LAMP Parking Lamps

REARDEFOG

Rear Defogger

RUN/CRNK Switched Power

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is located on the driverside edge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 10-45

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Seats

2 Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

Fuses Usage

3 Steering WheelControls Backlight

4 Driver Door Module

5 Dome Lamps, DriverSide Turn Signal

Fuses Usage

6 Driver Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

7 Instrument PanelBack Lighting

8 Passenger Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

9 Passenger DoorModule, Driver Unlock

10 Power Door Lock 2(Unlock Feature)

11 Power Door Lock 2(Lock Feature)

12 Stoplamps, CenterHigh‐MountedStoplamp

13 Rear Climate Controls

14 Power Mirror

15 Body ControlModule (BCM)

16 Accessory PowerOutlets


10-46 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

17 Interior Lamps

18 Power Door Lock 1(Unlock Feature)

19 Rear SeatEntertainment

20 Ultrasonic RearParking Assist, PowerLiftgate

21 Power Door Lock 1(Lock Feature)

22 Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

23 Rear Wiper

24 Cooled Seats

25 Driver Seat Module,Remote Keyless EntrySystem

26 Driver Power DoorLock (Unlock Feature)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

LT DR Driver Side PowerWindow CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DRDriver DoorHarnessConnection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector

Center Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The center instrument panel fuseblock is located underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View


BODY 2 Body HarnessConnector 2



HEADLINER3

Headliner HarnessConnector 3


Vehicle Care 10-47


HEADLINER2


HEADLINER1


SEO/UPFITTER

Special EquipmentOption UpfitterHarness Connector

CircuitBreaker Usage

CB1 Passenger SidePower Window CircuitBreaker

CB2 Passenger SeatCircuit Breaker

CB3 Driver Seat CircuitBreaker

CB4 Rear Sliding Window

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


10-48 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10-57 for inflation pressureadjustment for high speeddriving.

20‐Inch Tires

If the vehicle has 20‐inch P275/55R20 size tires, they areclassified as touring tires andare designed for on road use.The low‐profile, wide treaddesign is not recommended for“off‐road” driving or commercialuses such as snow plowing. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9-5and Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment on page 9-96for additional information.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact

with road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”


Vehicle Care 10-49

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-49.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-66.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shorter

tread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread and

compound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10-49.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have All-TerrainTires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving onpage 9-5.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection onpage 10-62.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger and light truck tiresidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


Vehicle Care 10-51

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10-68.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10-56and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

(D) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.


10-52 Vehicle Care

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(E) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. The

letter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias


Vehicle Care 10-53

ply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire

(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size mean

a light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the light truck (LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Load Range: Load Range.

(G) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).


10-54 Vehicle Care

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-56.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can also

identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10-56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-65.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-68.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by

68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.


Vehicle Care 10-57

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-84 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,

add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Some

(Continued)


10-58 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

high-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/55R20 size tires require inflationpressure adjustment when drivingthe vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tireinflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi)above the recommended cold tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when high-speed driving

has ended. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15 and Tire Pressure onpage 10-56.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-59.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation


10-60 Vehicle Care

and displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-28 and TireMessages on page 5-43.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-56.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-62, Tire Rotation onpage 10-63 and Tires onpage 10-47.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-66.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's Q and Kbuttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.


10-62 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC) vehicleinformation button until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

If the vehicle does not have RKEor DIC buttons, press the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument cluster until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button to

activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


Vehicle Care 10-63

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment.

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10-65 and WheelReplacement on page 10-70.

If your vehicle has dual rearwheels, also see Dual TireRotation on page 10-65.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels (exceptpolished forged aluminumwheels).

Vehicles with polished forgedaluminum dual wheels havethree unique wheels; a front, arear outer and a rear inner.These wheels cannot be rotatedto another position, however,they can be rotated from left toright to the same position.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas polished forged aluminumdual rear wheels. The sparewheel can be used in anyposition and can be rotated withthe rear inner wheels.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and

Loading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-56and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), if the vehiclehas one. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-59.

Check that the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10-73.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced, check thewheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper torque and wheel nuttightening information, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10-73.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-62 andTire Rotation on page 10-63. Alsosee Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tire Pressure on page 10-56,for information on proper tireinflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection on page 10-62 and TireRotation on page 10-63 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure


10-66 Vehicle Care

maintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,

traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-50 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-63 for


Vehicle Care 10-67

information on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle (twofor single rear wheels, four fordual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-58.


10-68 Vehicle Care

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-66 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-69

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-70 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced on a dualwheel setup, check the wheel nuttorque after 160, 1 600 and10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)of driving. For proper torque, see“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-72 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has dual wheels orP265/65R18, P275/55R20,LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18,LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,P285/45R22 or 285/45R22 sizetires, do not use tire chains. Theycan damage the vehicle becausethere is not enough clearance.Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combination

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If the vehicle does nothave dual wheels and has a tiresize other than P265/65R18, P275/55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,P285/45R22, or 285/45R22, usetire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use chainsthat are the proper size for thetires. Install them on the tires ofthe rear axle. Do not use chainson the tires of the front axle.Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely


10-72 Vehicle Care

fastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If you can hear thechains contacting the vehicle,stop and retighten them. If thecontact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage the vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-5.


Vehicle Care 10-73

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear– not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

6. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Crew Cab

A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit

B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks


10-74 Vehicle Care

Regular Cab


B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

Extended Cab


B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob

For regular cab models, theequipment you will need is behindthe passenger seat. For extendedand crew cab models, theequipment is on the shelf behind thepassenger side second row seat.

1. Turn the knob on the jackcounterclockwise to lower thejack head to release the jackfrom its holder.

2. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

3. Turn the wing nut used to retainthe storage bag and toolscounterclockwise to remove it.

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-75

A. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist Assembly

C. Hoist Cable

D. Tire/Wheel Retainer

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Hoist End of Extension Tool

G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

H. Wheel Wrench

I. Jack Handle Extensions

J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped)

1. Open the spare tire lock coveron the bumper and use theignition key to remove the sparetire lock (J). To remove the sparetire lock, insert the ignition keyturn and pull straight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H)and the two jack handleextensions (I), as shown.

3. Insert the hoist end (openend) (F) of the extension throughthe hole (G) in the rear bumper.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (F) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


10-76 Vehicle Care

5. Pull the spare tire out from underthe vehicle.

6. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable and spring.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack Handle Extension

E. Wheel Wrench

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),the jack handle (C), the jack handleextensions (D), and the wheelwrench (E).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-72 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-77

2. If the vehicle has wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.

If the vehicle has a center capwith wheel nut caps, the wheelnut caps are designed to staywith the center cap after they areloosened. Remove the entirecenter cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centercap, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel, and gently pry it out.

3. Use the wheel wrench and turn itcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove thewheel nuts yet.

Front Position - 1500 Models


10-78 Vehicle Care

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown. If the flat tireis on the front of the vehicle(1500Model vehicles), positionthe jack under the bracketattached to the vehicle's frame,behind the flat tire.

Front Position - All Other Models

Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown. If the flat tireis on the front of the vehicle (allother models), position the jackon the frame behind the flat tire.

Rear Position – 1500 Models

5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for1500 models position the jackunder the rear axle about 5 cm(2 in) inboard of the shockabsorber bracket.

Rear Position – All Other Models


Vehicle Care 10-79

For all other models, position thejack under the rear axle betweenthe spring anchor and the shockabsorber bracket.

If a snow plow has been addedto the front of the vehicle, lowerthe snow plow fully beforeraising the vehicle.

Make sure that the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely between thegrooves that are on thejack head.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)


10-80 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

come off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.


Vehicle Care 10-81

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence, asshown, by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

For vehicles with dual wheels, havea technician check the wheel nuttightness of all wheels with a torquewrench after the first 160 km(100 mi) and then 1600 km(1,000 mi) after that. Repeat thisservice whenever you have a tireremoved or serviced. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for more information.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall either thecenter cap, or bolt-on hub cap,depending on what the vehicle isequipped with. For center caps,

place the cap on the wheel and tapit into place until it seats flush withthe wheel. The cap only goes onone way. Be sure to line up the tabon the center cap with theindentation on the wheel. Forbolt-on hub caps, align the plasticnut caps with the wheel nuts andthen tighten by hand. Then use thewheel wrench to tighten.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended period oftime or with the valve stem


10-82 Vehicle Care

pointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

A. Flat or Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist Assembly

C. Hoist Cable

D. Tire/Wheel Retainer

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Hoist End of Extension Tool

G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

H. Wheel Wrench

I. Jack Handle Extensions

J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the wheel retainer platedown and through the centerwheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) andextensions (I) together, asshown.

4. Insert the hoist end (F) throughthe hole (G) in the rear bumperand onto the hoist shaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.


Vehicle Care 10-83

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,if the vehicle has one.

To store the jack and jack tools:

A. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit

D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions

E. Tool Bag

F. Jack Mounting Bracket

G. Jack

H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks

1. Put the tools (D) in the toolbag (E) and place them in theretaining bracket (C).

2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B)and jack (G) together with thewing nut (A) and retainingbolt (H).

4. Position the jack (G) in themounting bracket (F). Positionthe holes in the base of thejack (G) onto the pin in themounting bracket (F).

5. Return them to their originallocation in the vehicle. For moreinformation, refer to “Removingthe Spare Tire and Tools” formore information.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had afully-inflated spare tire. A spare tiremay lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See TirePressure on page 10-56 andVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install or store a spare tire, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare” and “Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10-73.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a differentsize spare tire is installed, do notdrive in four-wheel drive until theflat tire is repaired and/orreplaced. The vehicle could bedamaged and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.Never use four-wheel drive whena different size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on your vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on your vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep thevehicle in two-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired orreplaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle.This way, the spare tire will beavailable in case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If your vehicle has aspare tire that does not match yourvehicle's original road tires andwheels in size and type, do notinclude the spare in the tire rotation.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-27.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. If you have a vehicle with adiesel engine with two batteries,you should know before youbegin that, especially in coldweather, you may not be able toget enough power from a singlebattery in another vehicle to startyour diesel engine. If yourvehicle has more than one

battery, using the battery that iscloser to the starter will reduceelectrical resistance. This islocated on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwantedground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not inNeutral.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!


10-86 Vehicle Care

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal, islocated under a red plastic coverat the positive battery post. Touncover the positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.

If your vehicle has a gasolineengine, the remote negative (-)terminal is a stud located on theright front of the engine, wherethe negative battery cableattaches.

If your vehicle has a dieselengine, the remote negative (-)terminal is the negative (-) poston the auxiliary battery on thedriver side of the enginecompartment.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.


Vehicle Care 10-87

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect the

negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L, 6.2Land 6.6L Similar)

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the good

battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

9. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto the remote negative (−)terminal, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminalcover, to its original position.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not lash or hook tothe chassis componentsincluding the front and rearsubframes, suspension controlarms and links during towing andrecovery of a disabled vehicle orto secure the vehicle to a flatbedcar carrier. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the flatbed car carrier.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drive

transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle and shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

2. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake.

3. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). The driver or otherscould be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set beforethe transfer case is shifted toN (Neutral).

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9-40 for the properprocedure to select the Neutralposition for the vehicle.

5. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-91

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key— thesteering wheel will still turn.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-40 for the proper procedureto take the vehicle out of the Neutralposition.

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Notice: If a two-wheel drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section formore information.

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.


10-92 Vehicle Care

{ Warning


5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9-40 for the properprocedure to select the neutralposition for the vehicle.

8. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-40.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a two-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-54.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).





Vehicle Care 10-93

Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-54.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).



{ Warning


7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9-40 for the properprocedure to select the neutralposition for the vehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-40.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct


10-94 Vehicle Care

product usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed and

repaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishes

that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,

calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,


10-96 Vehicle Care

leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to


Vehicle Care 10-97

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per

3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see themaintenance schedule section inthe Duramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesy

transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-68.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-6.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-56.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-62.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-23.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service

for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-63.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-6 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-17.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-23.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-93. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-34.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-56.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-62.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15.

. Inspect brake system.



. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-93.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-20.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-93.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-32.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-33.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-33.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-33.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof (CrewCab) on page 2-21 or Sunroof(Extended Cab) on page 2-20.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing onpage 10-73.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(3) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Extreme service. For vehiclesmainly driven off-road in four-wheeldrive or used in farming, mining,forestry, Department of NaturalResources (DNR), or snow plowing.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(7) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160 km/100 mi, 1 600 km/1,000 mi and 9 700 km/6,000 mi.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-96 and Exterior Care onpage 10-93.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or anAllison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-6.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-17.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.




Manual Transmission Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349, inCanada 10953465).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle (1500 Series)- Four-WheelDrive

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, inCanada 89021672).

Front Axle (1500, 2500 HD, and 3500HD Series)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive with 4-Speed Auto.Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, inCanada 10953511).




Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Body Door Hinge Pins, TailgateHinge and Linkage, and Fuel Door

Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,Latch Bolt, and Linkage

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*

High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C

Oil Filter

4.3L V6 25010792 PF47

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 12568387 41-101

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —

*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for more information.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.6 L 16.5 qt

4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt

5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt

6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 15.5 L 16.4 qt

6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.9 L 16.8 qt


Technical Data 12-3


Metric English

Engine Oil with Filter

4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal

1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal

3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal

3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt


12-4 Technical Data


Metric English

Transmission Fluid - Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 4.7 L 5.0 qt

6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.0 L 6.3 qt

6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.0 L 7.4 qt

Transmission Fluid - Manual (Drain and Refill)

1500 Series 4.4 L 4.6 qt

3500 Series 3.5 L 3.7 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 ft lb

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 (LU3) X 1.52 mm (0.060 in)

4.8L V8 (L20) A 1.02 mm (0.040 in)


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Specifications (cont'd)

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management™ (IronBlock) (LMG)

0 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management™ (AluminumBlock) (LC9)

7 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management™ (AluminumBlock)(LZ1)

J 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.2L V8 FlexFuel (Aluminum Block) (L9H) 2 1.02 mm (0.040 in)


12-6 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V6 Engines

V8 Engines



Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,

must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may be



restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receipt

to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada), andextended powertrain warranties inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”



furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.



General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice to

ensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/

corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.



Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-28.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled



original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.



Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the



OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the navigation manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record

personal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergency button> to get a priority connection to anEmergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”


14-4 OnStar

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. The system responds“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” The system responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing. Thesystem responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” The system responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple, Androidand BlackBerry devices to checkvehicle fuel level, oil life, or tirepressure; to start the vehicle (ifequipped) or unlock it; or to connectto an OnStar Advisor. For OnStarRemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. In the U.S. see www.onstar.com

(U.S.) or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. In Canada see www.onstar.ca(Canada) or call1-888-4.ONSTAR.(1-888-466-7827).

. TTY 1–877–248–2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may prevent

service such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-96. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-31Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-24AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-16Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


i-2 INDEX

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49

BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-22Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38Pick-up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-69Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-63Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71


INDEX i-3

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-58Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Climate Control Systems . . .8-1, 8-4Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-6Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28


i-4 INDEX

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-33Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Cooling System Messages . . .5-39Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6

Engine (cont'd)Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-32Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2


INDEX i-5

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-12

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-40Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-69Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-31Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68Requirements, California . . . . .9-69System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10


i-6 INDEX

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-4

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-57Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-55Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-41Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-50LampsAuxiliary RoofMounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


INDEX i-7

Lamps (cont'd)Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Pick-up Box Identificationand Fender Marker . . . . . . . . 10-36

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Lights (cont'd)Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38


i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont'd)Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-39Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Object Detection System . . . . .5-41Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Mirrors (cont'd)Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-31

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


INDEX i-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Overview,InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-4, 7-6

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-31Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49

Pick-up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-27Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-47

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-63Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68


i-10 INDEX

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-19

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-58


INDEX i-11

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-32Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7TiresAll-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52


i-12 INDEX

Tires (cont'd)Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-73Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-84General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-73Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-89Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-95Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-95Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-76

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-10, 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-62Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-45


INDEX i-13

Vehicle (cont'd)Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34


i-14 INDEX

2 NOTES

manual de usuario silverado 2500hd 3500hd

Documents